D103230 final - Guest Home Page
Instruction Manual
Form 5807
May 2007
DVC6000 SIS
DVC6000 Series FIELDVUE
Digital Valve Controllers for
Safety Instrumented System
(SIS) Solutions
Introduction
1
Installation
2
375 Field Communicator Basics
3
Basic Setup
4
Detailed Setup
5
Calibration
6
Viewing Device Information
7
Principle of Operation
8
Maintenance
9
Parts
10
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
11
Glossary
Index
12
Glossary
13
Index
This manual applies to:
DVC6000 SIS Digital Valve Controllers
Model 375 Field
Communicator
Firmware
Revision
Hardware
Revision
Device
Description
Revision
2
7
1
1
D103230X012
Device
Revision
www.Fisher.com
DVC6000 SIS
Fast-Key Sequence
Function/Variable
Actuator Style
Alert Conditions
Alert Record Full Enable
Alert Record Not Empty Alert Enable
Analog Input
Analog Input Calibration
Analog Input Range Hi
Analog Input Range Lo
Analog Input Units
Auto Test Interval
Auto Travel Calibration
Autocalibration in Progress Enable
Auxiliary Input
Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable
Auxiliary Terminal Mode
Burst Command
Burst Enable
Calibration in Progress Enab
Calibration Location
Clear Record
Command 3 (Trending) Press
Control Mode
Critical NVM Shutdown
Cycle Count
Cycle Count Alert Enable
Cycle Count Alert Point
Date
Dead Band (Cycle Count / Travel Accum)
Define Custom Characteristic
Descriptor
Device Description Information
Device ID
Device Revision
Diagnostic Data Available Enable
Diagnostic in Progress Enable
Display Record
Drive Current Shutdown
Drive Signal
Fast-Key
Sequence
1-2-6-4
2-1
1-2-3-7-2
1-2-3-7-1
3-1
1-3-2-3
1-2-5-3-1
1-2-5-3-2
1-2-5-2-3
1-2-7-3
1-3-1-1
1-2-4-2-2
3-6-1
1-2-3-3-1-2
1-2-3-3-1-1
1-2-3-3-1-3
1-2-5-7
1-2-1-4-2
1-2-1-4-1
1-2-4-2-1
1-2-5-9-2
1-2-3-7-4
1-2-1-4-3
Hot Key-2
1-2-1-2
1-2-3-1-3-4
1-2-3-5-1-2
3-6-5
1-2-3-5-1-1
1-2-3-5-1-3
1-2-5-1-4
1-2-3-5-2-1
1-2-2-4
1-2-5-1-3
3-8
3-7-2
3-7-5
1-2-4-2-4
1-2-4-2-3
1-2-3-7-3
1-2-3-1-1
3-4
1-2-3-1-2-2
Coordinates(1)
4-D
2-E
8-F
8-F
2-F
4-E
6-H
6-H
6-H
3-D
4-E
8-H
5-G
10-C
10-C
10-D
5-F
6-A
6-A
8-G
6-H
8-G
6-A
1-A
4-B
11-C
5-F
3-H
10-F
10-F
6-F
10-F
4-C
6-F
2-G
4-H
4-H
8-H
8-H
8-F
9-C
3-F
10-C
Function/Variable
Drive Signal Alert Enable
DVC Power Up
End Point Control Enable
Failure Group Enable
Feedback Connection
Firmware Revision
Flash ROM Shutdown
Hardware Revision
HART Tag
HART Universal Revision
Input Characterization
Instrument Date and Time
Instrument Level
Instrument Mode
Instrument Serial Number
Instrument Time Invalid Enable
Integral Dead Zone
Integral Limit
Integrator Saturated Hi Enable
Integrator Saturated Lo Enable
Lag Time
Last Calibration Status
Manual Travel Calibration
Manufacturer
Maximum Supply Pressure
Message
Miscellaneous Group Enable
Model
Multi-Drop Alert Enable
No Free Time Shutdown
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable
Number of Power Ups
Offline/Failed Alert Enable
Partial Stroke Test
Partial Stroke Test Enable
Partial Stroke Test Pressure Limit
Partial Stroke Test Start Point
Fast-Key
Sequence
1-2-3-1-2-1
1-2-7-4
1-2-2-2-2-1
1-2-3-7-5-1
1-2-6-5
3-7-6
1-2-3-1-3-5
3-7-7
1-2-5-1-1
3-7-1
3-7-9
1-2-2-3
1-2-4-1-2
1-2-5-8
3-7-8
Hot Key-1
1-2-1-1
1-2-5-1-6
1-2-4-1-1
1-2-4-4-4
1-2-2-1-2-1
1-2-4-4-3
1-2-2-1-2-2
1-2-4-4-1
1-2-4-4-2
1-2-2-5-3
1-2-5-9-1
1-3-1-2
3-7-3
1-2-6-1
1-2-5-6
1-2-5-1-2
1-2-3-7-5-3
3-7-4
1-2-4-3-2
1-2-3-1-3-6
1-2-3-1-3-3
2-3-4
3-6-9
1-2-3-1-3-1
2-5
1-2-7-1
1-2-3-6-1
1-2-2-2-2-2
Coordinates(1)
10-C
3-D
6-C
10-G
4-D
4-H
11-C
4-I
6-F
4-H
4-I
4-C
8-G
5-F
4-I
1-A
4-B
6-F
8-G
8-I
9-A
8-I
9-A
8-H
8-H
6-D
6-H
4-E
4-H
4-D
5-F
6-F
10-G
4-H
8-H
11-C
11-B
4-F
5-H
11-B
2-F
3-D
8-F
8-C
1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the foldout menu tree.
continued on facing page
Unfold this sheet to see the 375 Field Communicator Menu Tree
i
i
DVC6000 SIS
Model 375 Field Communicator Menu Tree for FIELDVUER DVC6000
Instrument Level SIS
Burst Mode
1 Burst Enable
2 Burst Command
3 Cmd 3(Trending)Press
1-2-1-4
Hot Key
1 Instrument Mode
2 Control Mode
3 Protection
4 Stabilize/Optimize
1-1
Basic Setup
1 Setup Wizard
2 Performance Tuner
Detailed Setup
1 Mode and Protection
2 Response Control
3 Alerts
4 Status
5 Instrument
6 Valve & Actuator
7 SIS/Partial Stroke
1-2
1-2-7
Configure / Setup
1 Basic Setup
2 Detailed Setup
3 Calibrate
1
Online
1 Configure / Setup
2 Device Diagnostics
3 Device Variables
2
3
1
Field Communicator
1 Offline
2 Online
3 Utility
1-2-1
1-3
SIS/Partial Stroke
1 PST Enable
2 PST Vars View/Edit
3 Auto Test Interval
4 DVC Power Up
Calibrate
1 Travel Calibration
2 Sensor Calibration
3 Relay Adjust
4 Restore Factory
4 Settings
5 PST Calibration
Device Diagnostics
1 Alert Conditions
2 Status
3 Device Record
4 Stroke Valve
5 Partial Stroke Test
Device Variables
1 Analog In
2 Tvl Set Pt
3 Travel
4 Drive Signal
5 Pressures
6 Variables
7 Device Information
8 DD Information
1-1-1 indicates fast-key sequence to reach menu
1
This menu is available by pressing the left
arrow key from the previous menu.
ii
Valve & Actuator
1 Manufacturer
2 Valve Serial Num
3 Valve Style
4 Actuator Style
5 Feedback Conn
6 Tvl Sensor Motion
1-3-1
Travel Calibration
1 AutoTvl Calib
2 Man Tvl Calib
1-3-2
Sensor Calibration
1 Press Sensors
2 Tvl Sensor Adjust
3 Analog In Calib
2-3
Notes:
3-7
2
1-2-6
3
Pressures
1 Pressure A
2 Pressure B
3 Pressure Diff
4 Supply Press
3-6
Device Information
1 HART Tag
2 Device ID
3 Manufacturer
4 Model
5 Device Rev
6 Firmware Rev
7 Hardware Rev
8 Inst Level
9 HART Univ Rev
4
1-2-2-2
Tvl/Press Control
1 Tvl/Press Cutoffs
2 End Pt Press Control
1-2-2-5
Dynamic Response
1 SP Rate Open
2 SP Rate Close
3 Lag Time
1-2-3
1-2-4
Device Record
1 Temp Max
2 Temp Min
3 Run Time
4 Num of Power Ups
Tuning
1 Travel Tuning
2 Integral Settings
3 Pressure Tuning
1-2-2-1
Response Control
1 Tuning
2 Tvl/Press Control
3 Input Char
4 Define Custom Char
5 Dynamic Response
1-2-5
3-5
1
1-2-2
Mode and Protection
1 Instrument Mode
2 Control Mode
3 Restart Ctrl Mode
4 Burst Mode
5 Protection
Alerts
1 Electronics Alerts
2 Sensor Alerts
3 Enviroment Alerts
4 Travel Alerts
5 Travel History Alerts
6 SIS Alerts
7 Alert Record
Status
1 Instrument Time
2 Calibrations and Diagnostics
3 Operational
4 Integrator
Instrument
1-2-5-1
1 General
2 Units
3 Analog Input Range
4 Relay Type
5 Zero Pwr Cond
6 Max Supply Press
7 Aux Term Mode
8 Inst Date and Time
9 Calib Status and Loc
Variables
1 Aux Input
2 Temperature
3 Temp Max
4 Temp Min
5 Cycle Count
6 Tvl Accum
7 Raw Tvl Input
8 Run Time
9 Num of Power Ups
5
1-2-5-2
General
1 HART Tag
2 Message
3 Descriptor
4 Date
5 Valve Serial Num
6 Inst Serial Num
7 Polling Address
Units
1 Pressure Units
2 Temp Units
3 Analog In Units
1-2-5-3
Analog Input Range
1 Input Range Hi
2 Input Range Lo
1-2-5-9
Calib Status and Loc
1 Last Calib Status
2 Calib Loc
6
ii
DVC6000 SIS
Travel Tuning
1 Tvl Tuning Set
2 Tvl Integ Enable
3 Tvl Integ Gain
4 Stabilize / Optimize
5 Peformance Tuner
1-2-2-1-1
1-2-2-1-2
Pressure Tuning
1 Press Tuning Set
2 Press Integ Enab
3 Press Integ Gain
1-2-2-1-3
1-2-3-1-3
1-2-3-1-2
1-2-3-3
Drive Signal Alert
1 Drive Signal Alrt Enab
2 Drive Signal
Sensor Alerts
1 Tvl Sensor Shutdown
2 Temp Sensor Shutdown
3 Press Sensor Shutdown
1-2-3-4-5
1-2-3-7
1-2-4-1
1-2-4-2
1-2-4-3
1-2-4-4
7
B
1-2-3-7-5
1-2-3-5-3
1-2-3-4-6
1-2-3-4-7
Cycle Count
1 Cycle Count Alrt Enab
2 Cycle Count
3 Cycle Count Alrt Pt
Travel Deviation Alert
1 Tvl Dev Alrt Enab
2 Tvl Dev Alrt Pt
3 Tvl Dev Time
Travel Limit Alerts
1 Tvl Alrt Hi Hi Enab
2 Tvl Alrt Lo Lo Enab
3 Tvl Alrt Hi Hi Pt
4 Tvl Alrt Lo Lo Pt
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts
1 Tvl Alrt Hi Enab
2 Tvl Alrt Lo Enab
3 Tvl Alrt Hi Pt
4 Tvl Alrt Lo Pt
D
E
Travel Limit / Cutoff Alerts
1 Tvl Limit/Cutoff Hi Alrt Enab
2 Tvl Limit/Cutoff Lo Alrt Enab
3 Tvl/Press Cut Hi
4 Tvl/Press Cut Lo
1 Dead Band
F
Tvl Accum
1 Tvl Accum Alrt Enab
2 Tvl Accum
3 Tvl Accum Alrt Pt
Alert Groups
1 Failure Group Enab
2 Valve Group Enab
3 Misc Group Enab
G
Calibrations and Diagnostics
1 Cal in Progress Enab
2 Autocal in Progress Enab
3 Diag in Progress Enab
4 Diag Data Avail Enab
Operational
1 Press Ctrl Active Enab
2 Multi-Drop Enab
H
Integrator
1 Integrator Sat Hi Enab
2 Integrator Sat Lo Enab
3 Integ Limit
4 Integ DeadZ
8
iii
1-2-3-5-2
Alert Record
1 Alrt Record Not Empty Enab
2 Alrt Record Full Enab
3 Display Record
4 Clear Record
5 Alert Groups
Instrument Time
1 Inst Time Invalid Enab
2 Inst Date and Time
Travel Alerts
1 Travel
2 Tvl Set Pt
3 Tvl Alrt DB
4 Travel Deviation Alert
5 Travel Limit Alerts
6 Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts
7 Trave Limit / Cutoff Alerts
1-2-3-5-1
SIS Alerts
1 PST Press Limit
2 Press Dev Alrt Enab
3 Press Dev Alrt Pt
4 Press Dev Time
1-2-3-4-4
Supply Press Lo Alrt
1 Supply Press Lo Alrt Enab
2 Supply Press
3 Supply Press Lo Alrt Pt
1-2-3-3-2
Enviroment Alerts
1 Aux Terminal Alrt
2 Supply Press Lo Alrt
Travel History Alerts
1 Cycle Count
2 Cycle Count/Tvl Accum Deadband
3 Tvl Accum
Aux Terminal Alrt
1 Aux Terminal Alrt Enab
2 Aux Input
3 Aux Term Mode
1-2-3-3-1
1-2-3-4
1-2-3-6
Processor Impaired Alerts
1 Offline/Failed Alrt Enab
2 Power Starvation Alrt Enab
3 Non-Critical NVM Alrt Enab
4 Critical NVM Shutdown
5 Flash ROM Shutdown
6 No Free Time Shutdown
7 Reference Voltage Shutdown
C
Electronics Alerts
1 Drive Current Shutdown
2 Drive Signal Alert
3 Processor Impaired Alerts
1-2-3-2
1-2-3-5
A
Press Tuning Set
1 Press Tuning Set
2 Press Prop Gain
3 Press MLFB Gain
1-2-2-1-3-1
End Pt Press Control
1 End Pt Control Enab
2 PST Start Pt
3 Press Set Pt
4 Press Sat Time
1-2-3-1
Tvl Tuning Set
1 Tvl Tuning Set
2 Tvl Prop Gain
3 Tvl Velocity Gain
4 Tvl MLFB Gain
Integral Settings
1 Integ DeadZ
2 Integ Limit
Tvl/Press Cutoffs
1 Tvl/Press Cut Hi
2 Tvl/Press Cut Lo
1-2-2-2-1
1-2-2-2-2
1-2-2-1-1-1
Menu Tree for for Model 375 Field Communicator
Device Description Revision 1
9
10
11
I
12
iii
DVC6000 SIS
Fast-Key Sequence (continued)
Function/Variable
Partial Stroke Test Variables View/Edit
Performance Tuner
Polling Address
Power Starvation Alert Enable
Pressure A
Pressure B
Pressure Deviation Alert Enable
Pressure Deviation Alert Point
Pressure Deviation Time
Pressure Differential
Pressure Integral Control Enable
Pressure Integral Gain
Pressure MLFB Gain
Pressure Proportional Gain
Pressure Saturation Time
Pressure Sensor Shutdown
Pressure Sensors—Calibration
Pressure Set Point
Pressure Tuning Set
Pressure Units
Protection
PST Calibration
Raw Travel Input
Reference Voltage Shutdown
Relay Adjust
Relay Type
Restart Control Mode
Restore Factory Settings
Run Time
Set Point Rate Close
Set Point Rate Open
Setup Wizard
Stabilize/Optimize
Status
Stroke Valve
Supply Pressure
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point
Temperature
Fast-Key
Sequence
1-2-7-2
1-1-2
1-2-2-1-1-5
1-2-5-1-7
1-2-3-1-3-2
3-5-1
3-5-2
1-2-3-6-2
1-2-3-6-3
1-2-3-6-4
3-5-3
1-2-2-1-3-2
1-2-2-1-3-3
1-2-2-1-3-1-3
1-2-2-1-3-1-2
1-2-2-2-2-4
1-2-3-2-3
1-3-2-1
1-2-2-2-2-3
1-2-2-1-3-1-1
1-2-5-2-1
Hot Key-3
1-2-1-5
1-3-5
3-6-7
1-2-3-1-3-7
1-3-3
1-2-5-4
1-2-1-3
1-3-4
2-3-3
3-6-8
1-2-2-5-2
1-2-2-5-1
1-1-1
Hot Key-4
1-2-2-1-1-4
2-2
2-4
3-5-4
1-2-3-3-2-2
1-2-3-3-2-1
1-2-3-3-2-3
3-6-2
Coordinates(1)
3-D
2-B
8-A
6-F
11-B
4-G
4-G
8-F
8-F
8-F
4-G
8-B
8-B
10-B
10-B
8-C
9-D
4-E
8-C
10-B
6-G
1-A
4-B
3-E
5-H
11-C
3-E
5-F
4-B
3-E
4-F
5-H
6-C
6-C
2-B
1-A
8-A
2-F
2-F
4-G
10-D
10-D
10-D
5-G
Function/Variable
Temperature Maximum
Temperature Minimum
Temperature Sensor Shutdown
Temperature Units
Travel
Travel / Pressure Cutoff Hi
Travel / Pressure Cutoff Lo
Travel Accumulator
Travel Accumulator Alert Enable
Travel Accumulator Alert Point
Travel Alert Dead Band
Travel Alert Hi Enable
Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable
Travel Alert Hi Hi Point
Travel Alert Hi Point
Travel Alert Lo Enable
Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable
Travel Alert Lo Lo Point
Travel Alert Lo Point
Travel Deviation Alert Enable
Travel Deviation Alert Point
Travel Deviation Time
Travel Integral Control Enable
Travel Integral Gain
Travel Limit / Cutoff Hi Alert Enable
Travel Limit / Cutoff Lo Alert Enable
Travel MLFB Gain
Travel Proportional Gain
Travel Sensor Adjust
Travel Sensor Motion
Travel Sensor Shutdown
Travel Set Point
Travel Tuning Set
Travel Velocity Gain
Valve Group Enable
Valve Serial Number
Valve Style
Zero Power Condition
Fast-Key
Sequence
3-6-3
2-3-1
3-6-4
2-3-2
1-2-3-2-2
1-2-5-2-2
3-3
1-2-3-4-1
1-2-3-4-7-3
1-2-2-2-1-1
1-2-3-4-7-4
1-2-2-2-1-2
3-6-6
1-2-3-5-3-2
1-2-3-5-3-1
1-2-3-5-3-3
1-2-3-4-3
1-2-3-4-6-1
1-2-3-4-5-1
1-2-3-4-5-3
1-2-3-4-6-3
1-2-3-4-6-2
1-2-3-4-5-2
1-2-3-4-5-4
1-2-3-4-6-4
1-2-3-4-4-1
1-2-3-4-4-2
1-2-3-4-4-3
1-2-2-1-1-2
1-2-2-1-1-3
1-2-3-4-7-1
1-2-3-4-7-2
1-2-2-1-1-1-4
1-2-2-1-1-1-2
1-3-2-2
1-2-6-6
1-2-3-2-1
1-2-3-4-2
3-2
1-2-2-1-1-1-1
1-2-2-1-1-1-3
1-2-3-7-5-2
1-2-5-1-5
1-2-6-2
1-2-6-3
1-2-5-5
Coordinates(1)
5-G
4-F
5-H
4-F
9-D
6-G
2-F
10-D
12-F
9-B
12-F
9-B
6-H
10-F
10-F
10-F
10-E
10-E
12-D
12-D
12-E
12-E
12-D
12-D
12-E
12-D
12-D
12-D
8-A
8-A
12-E
12-E
10-A
10-A
4-E
4-D
9-D
10-E
2-F
10-A
10-A
10-G
6-F
4-D
4-D
5-F
1. Coordinates are to help locate the item on the foldout menu tree.
v
v
DVC6000 SIS
THE FIELDVUER DVC6000 SERIES DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER IS A CORE COMPONENT OF THE
PLANTWEB R DIGITAL PLANT ARCHITECTURE. THE DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER POWERS PLANTWEB
BY CAPTURING AND DELIVERING VALVE DIAGNOSTIC DATA. COUPLED WITH AMSt VALVELINKR
SOFTWARE, THE DVC6000 PROVIDES USERS WITH AN ACCURATE PICTURE OF VALVE PERFORMANCE,
INCLUDING ACTUAL STEM POSITION, INSTRUMENT INPUT SIGNAL AND PNEUMATIC PRESSURE TO
THE ACTUATOR. USING THIS INFORMATION, THE DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER DIAGNOSES NOT ONLY
ITSELF, BUT ALSO THE VALVE AND ACTUATOR TO WHICH IT IS MOUNTED.
DVC6000 Series FIELDVUE Digital Valve Controller
vi
vi
Introduction
1-1
Section 1 Introduction
May 2007
1
Scope of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Educational Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
1-1
DVC6000 SIS
Table 1-1. DVC6000 SIS Tier Capabilities
Auto Calibration
Custom Characterization
Alerts
Step Response, Drive Signal Test & Dynamic Error Band
1
Advanced Diagnostics (Valve Signature)
Performance Tuner
Performance Diagnostics(1)
Solenoid Valve Health Monitoring(1)
Partial Stroke Testing
1. Available in Firmware Revision 7 and higher.
Scope of Manual
This instruction manual includes specifications,
installation, operation, and maintenance information
for FIELDVUE DVC6000 Series digital valve
controllers for Safety Instrumented System (SIS)
Solutions.
This instruction manual describes using the Model 375
Field Communicator with device description revision 1,
used with DVC6000 device revision 2, firmware
revision 7, to setup and calibrate the instrument. You
can also use AMS ValveLink Software version 7.3
or higher to setup, calibrate, and diagnose the valve
and instrument. For information on using AMS
ValveLink Software with the instrument, refer to the
AMS ValveLink Software help or documentation.
Do not install, operate, or maintain a DVC6000 digital
valve controller without first being fully trained and
qualified in valve, actuator, and accessory installation,
operation and maintenance, and carefully reading
and understanding the contents of this manual. If you
have any questions concerning these instructions,
contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office before proceeding.
Note
Neither Emerson, Emerson Process
Management, nor any of their affiliated
entities assumes responsibility for the
selection, use, and maintenance of any
product. Responsibility for the
selection, use, and maintenance of any
product remains with the purchaser
and end-user.
1-2
W8308-3 SIS
Figure 1-1. FIELDVUE Type DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller
in SIS Solution Mounted on a Quarter-Turn Actuator
Conventions Used in this Manual
Procedures that require the use of the Model 375
Field Communicator have the Field Communicator
symbol in the heading.
Procedures that are accessible with the Hot Key
on the Field Communicator will also have the Hot Key
symbol in the heading.
Some of the procedures also contain the sequence of
numeric keys required to display the desired Field
Communicator menu. For example, to access the
Basic Setup menu, from the Online menu, press 2
(selects Configure / Setup) followed by a 1 (selects
Basic Setup) followed by a second 1 (selects Setup
Wizard). The key sequence in the procedure heading
is shown as (2-1-1). The path required to accomplish
various tasks, the sequence of steps through the Field
Communicator menus, is also presented in textual
format. Menu selections are shown in italics, e.g.,
Calibrate. An overview of the Model 375 Field
Communicator menu structures are shown at the
beginning of this manual.
May 2007
Introduction
Description
DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers (figure 1-1)
are communicating, microprocessor-based
current-to-pneumatic instruments. In addition to the
normal function of converting an input current signal to
a pneumatic output pressure, the DVC6000 Series
digital valve controller, using the HART
communications protocol, gives easy access to
information critical to process operation. You can gain
information from the principal component of the
process, the control valve itself, using the Field
Communicator at the valve or at a field junction box, or
by using a personal computer or operator’s console
within the control room.
Using DVC6000 Series instruments for SIS solutions
permits partial stroking of the valve to minimize the
chance of valve failure upon a safety demand and,
consequently, the possibility of catastrophic situations.
A partial stroke test verifies valve movement with a
small ramp to the input. This ramp is small enough not
to disrupt production, but is large enough to confirm
that the valve is working. DVC6000 Series instruments
also provide state-of-the-art testing methods, which
reduce testing and maintenance time, improve system
performance, and provide diagnostic capabilities.
Using a personal computer and AMS ValveLink
Software, AMS Suite: Intelligent Device Manager, or a
Model 375 Field Communicator, you can perform
several operations with the DVC6000 Series digital
valve controller. You can obtain general information
concerning software revision level, messages, tag,
descriptor, and date. Diagnostic information is
available to aid you when troubleshooting. Input and
output configuration parameters can be set, and the
digital valve controller can be calibrated. Refer to table
1-1 for details on the capabilities of the SIS tier.
Specifications
WARNING
Refer to table 1-2 for application
specifications. Incorrect configuration
of a positioning instrument could
result in the malfunction of the
product, property damage or personal
injury.
1
Specifications for the DVC6000 Series digital valve
controllers are shown in table 1-2. Specifications for
the Field Communicator can be found in the product
manual for the Field Communicator.
Related Documents
Other documents containing information related to
DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers for safety
instrumented systems include:
FIELDVUE DVC6000 Series Digital Valve
Controllers for Safety Instrumented System (SIS)
Solutions (Bulletin 62.1:DVC6000 SIS)
Safety Manual for DVC6000 Series FIELDVUE
Digital Valve Controllers for Safety Instrumented
System (SIS) Solutions − Form 5743
Supplement to DVC6000 Series FIELDVUE
Digital Valve Controllers for Safety Instrumented
System (SIS) Solutions Instruction Manual, Partial
Stroke Test − Form 5825
Using the HART protocol, information from the field
can be integrated into control systems or be received
on a single loop basis.
Type LCP100 Local Control Panel Instruction
Manual − Form 5823
TÜV Certification
Type 2530H1 HART Interchange Multiplexer
Instruction Manual - Form 5407
TÜV has certified that valve-mounted DVC6000 Series
digital valve controller hardware, when operating in a
Safety Instrumented System with a 0 to 24 volt DC or
0 to 20 mA DC control signal, meets the requirements
of IEC 61508, and can be incorporated into Safety
Instrumented Function (SIF) loops that are rated to
Safety Integrity Level 3 (SIL3).
May 2007
FIELDVUE Type LC340 Line Conditioner
Instruction Manual − Form 5719
AMS ValveLink Software Help or
Documentation
All documents are available from your Emerson
Process Management sales office. Also visit our
website at www.FIELDVUE.com.
1-3
DVC6000 SIS
Table 1-2. Specifications
Steady-State Air Consumption(3,4)
Available Configurations
1
Low Bleed Relay
At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: Average value
0.056 normal m3/hr (2.1 scfh)
At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: Average value
0.184 normal m3/hr (6.9 scfh)
Valve-Mounted Instruments
Type DVC6010: Sliding stem applications
Type DVC6020: Rotary and long-stroke
sliding-stem applications [over 102 mm (4-inch)
travel]
Type DVC6030: Quarter-turn rotary applications
The low bleed relay is the standard relay for
DVC6000 SIS tier, used for On/Off applications.
Performance may be affected in throttling
applications.
All units can be used in either 4-wire or 2-wire
system installations.
DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers must have
the Safety Instrumented System Application (SIS)
option
Maximum Output Capacity(3,4)
At 1.4 bar (20 psig) supply pressure: 10.0 normal
m3/hr (375 scfh)
At 5.5 bar (80 psig) supply pressure: 29.5 normal
m3/hr (1100 scfh)
DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers can be
mounted on Fisher and other manufacturers rotary
and sliding-stem actuators.
Input Signal
Independent Linearity(1,5)
Point-to-Point:
Analog Input Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC, nominal; split
ranging available
Minimum voltage available at instrument terminals
must be 10.5 VDC for analog control, 11 VDC for
HART communication
Minimum Control Current: 4.0 mA
Minimum Current w/o Microprocessor Restart: 3.5
mA
Maximum Voltage: 30 VDC
Overcurrent Protection: Input circuitry limits current
to prevent internal damage.
Reverse Polarity Protection: No damage occurs
from reversal of loop current.
Multi-drop:
Instrument Power: 11 to 30 VDC at approximately
8 mA
Reverse Polarity Protection: No damage occurs
from reversal of loop current.
±0.50% of output span
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
Tested per IEC 61326-1 (Edition 1.1). Complies
with European EMC Directive. Meets emission
levels for Class A equipment (industrial locations)
and Class B equipment (domestic locations). Meets
immunity requirements for industrial locations
(Table A.1 in the IEC specification document).
Immunity performance is shown in table 1-3.
Operating Ambient Temperature Limits(2)
−40 to 80C (−40 to 176F) for most approved
valve-mounted instruments
Humidity Limits
0 to 100% condensing relative humidity
Electrical Classification
Output Signal(1)
Hazardous Area:
Pneumatic signal as required by the actuator, up to
95% of full supply pressure.
Minimum Span: 0.4 bar (6 psig)
Maximum Span: 9.5 bar (140 psig)
Action: Double, Single direct, and Single reverse
Explosion proof, Division 2,
Dust-Ignition proof, Intrinsic Safety
APPROVED
Supply Pressure(1,2)
Recommended: 1.7 bar (25 psi) or 0.3 bar (5 psi)
plus the maximum actuator requirements,
whichever is higher
Maximum: 10 bar (145 psig) or maximum pressure
rating of the actuator, whichever is lower
Explosion proof, Non-incendive,
Dust-Ignition proof, Intrinsic Safety
ATEX
Flameproof, Type n, Intrinsic Safety
IECEx
Flameproof, Type n, Intrinsic Safety
Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety
−continued−
1-4
May 2007
Introduction
Table 1-2. Specifications (continued)
Hazardous Area (continued):
Refer to Special Instructions for Safe Use and
Installation in Hazardous Locations in Section 2,
tables 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7, and 1-8 and figures 11-1,
11-2, 11-3, 11-4, 11-5, 11-6, 11-7, 11-8, and 11-9
for specific approval information.
Pollution Degree 2, Overvoltage Category III per
ANSI/ISA-82.02.01 (IEC 61010-1 Mod).
Electrical Housing: Meets NEMA 4X, CSA Type 4X,
IEC 60529 IP66
Auxiliary Terminal Contact: Nominal Electrical
Rating 3V, <1 mA; It is recommended that the
switch be sealed or have gold plated contacts to
avoid corrosion.
For proper operation of the auxiliary input terminal
capacitance should not exceed 18000pF.
IEC 61010 Compliance Requirements
(Valve-Mounted Instruments only)
Power Source: The loop current must be derived
from a Separated Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) power
source.
Environmental Conditions: Installation Category I
Connections
Supply Pressure: 1/4 NPT internal and integral
pad for mounting 67CFR regulator
Output Pressure: 1/4 NPT internal
Tubing: 3/8-inch metal, recommended
Vent: 3/8 NPT internal
Electrical: 1/2 NPT internal conduit connection
Stem Travel
DVC6010: 0 to 102 mm (4-inches) maximum travel
span
0 to 9.5 mm (0.375 inches) minimum travel span
DVC6020: 0 to 606 mm (23.875 inches) maximum
travel span
Shaft Rotation (DVC6020 and DVC6030)
0 to 50 degrees minimum
0 to 90 degrees maximum
1
Mounting
Designed for direct actuator mounting or remote
pipestand or wall mounting. Mounting the
instrument vertically, with the vent at the bottom of
the assembly, or horizontally, with the vent pointing
down, is recommended to allow drainage of
moisture that may be introduced via the instrument
air supply.
Weight
Valve-Mounted Instruments
Aluminum: 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs)
Stainless Steel(6): 7.7 kg (17 lbs)
Options
Supply and output pressure gauges or Tire
valves, Integral mounted filter regulator,
Stainless steel housing, module base, and
terminal box(6), Beacon Indicator, LCP100
local control panel
Declaration of SEP
Fisher Controls International LLC declares this
product to be in compliance with Article 3 paragraph
3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97 /
23 / EC. It was designed and manufactured in
accordance with Sound Engineering Practice (SEP)
and cannot bear the CE marking related to PED
compliance.
However, the product may bear the CE marking to
indicate compliance with other applicable EC
Directives.
1. Defined in ISA Standard S51.1.
2. The pressure/temperature limits in this document and any applicable code or standard should not be exceeded.
3. Values at 1.4 bar (20 psig) based on a single-acting direct relay; values at 5.5 bar (80 psig) based on double-acting relay.
4. Normal m3/hour − Normal cubic meters per hour at 0C and 1.01325 bar, absolute. Scfh − Standard cubic feet per hour at 60F and 14.7 psia
5. Typical value. Not applicable for travels less than 19 mm (0.75 inch) or for shaft rotation less than 60 degrees. Also, not applicable to DVC6020 digital valve controllers in long-stroke
applications.
6. The stainless steel option is available for Safety Instrumented Systems, however, TÜV approval is still in progress. Contact your Emerson Process Management sales office for additional
information.
May 2007
1-5
DVC6000 SIS
Table 1-3. Immunity Performance
Performance Criteria(1)
Port
1
Phenomenon
Basic Standard
Point-to-Point
Mode
Multi-drop Mode
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
A(2)
A
Radiated EM field
IEC 61000-4-3
A
A
Rated power frequency magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8
A
A
Burst
IEC 61000-4-4
A(2)
A
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
A(2)
A
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
A
A
Enclosure
I/O signal/control
1. A = No degradation during testing. B = Temporary degradation during testing, but is self-recovering.
2. Excluding auxiliary switch function, which meets Performance Criteria B.
Table 1-4. Type DVC6000 Series, Hazardous Area Classifications—Canada (CSA)
Certification
Body
CSA
Type
DVC60x0
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3)
Certification Obtained
Entity Rating
(Intrinsic Safety)
Class/Division
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,E,
F,G per drawing 29B3428
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
(Explosion Proof)
Class/Division
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
−−−
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
Class II Division 1 GP E,F,G
Class III Division 1
−−−
Temperature Code
Enclosure
Rating
T5(Tamb v 80C)
4X
T6(Tamb v 80C)
4X
T6(Tamb v 80C)
4X
Table 1-5. Type DVC6000 Series, Hazardous Area Classifications—United States (FM)
Certification
Body
Type
Certification Obtained
(Intrinsic Safety)
Class/Division
Class I,II,III Division 1 GP A,B,C,D,
E,F,G per drawing 29B3427
FM
DVC60x0
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3)
Entity Rating
Vmax = 30 VDC
Imax = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
(Explosion Proof)
Class/Division
Class I Division 1 GP B,C,D
−−−
Class I Division 2 GP A,B,C,D
Class II,III Division 1 GP E,F,G
Class II,III Division 2 GP F,G
−−−
Temperature Code
Enclosure
Rating
T5(Tamb v 80C)
4X
T6(Tamb v 80C)
4X
T6(Tamb v 80C)
4X
Table 1-6. Hazardous Area Classifications—ATEX
Certificate
Type
Certification Obtained
II 1 G D
Gas
EEx ia IIC T5/T6—Intrinsic Safety
Dust
T85C (Tamb v 80C)
ATEX
DVC60x0
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3)
II 2 G D
Gas
EEx d IIB+H2 T5/T6 —Flameproof
Dust
T90C (Tamb v 85C)
II 3 G D
Gas
EEx nCL IIC T5/T6 —Type n
Dust
T85C (Tamb v 80C)
1-6
Entity Rating
Ui = 30 VDC
Ii = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
−−−
−−−
Temperature Code
Enclosure
Rating
T5(Tamb v 80C)
T6 (Tamb v75C)
IP66
T5(Tamb v 85C)
T6 (Tamb v 75C)
IP66
T5(Tamb v 80C)
T6 (Tamb v 75C)
IP66
May 2007
Introduction
Table 1-7. Hazardous Area Classifications—IECEx
Certificate
Type
Certification Obtained
Gas
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 —Intrinsic Safety
IECEx
DVC60x0
DVC60x0S
(x = 1,2,3)
Entity Rating
Ui = 30 VDC
Ii = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
Temperature Code
Enclosure
Rating
T5(Tamb v 80C)
T6 (Tamb v 75C)
IP66
Gas
Ex d IIB+H2 T5/T6 —Flameproof
−−−
T5(Tamb v 80C)
T6 (Tamb v 75C)
IP66
Gas
Ex nC IIC T5/T6 —Type n
−−−
T5(Tamb v 80C)
T6 (Tamb v 75C)
IP66
Table 1-8. Hazardous Area Classifications—NEPSI
Certificate
NEPSI
Type
DVC60x0
(x = 1,2,3)
Certification Obtained
Gas
Ex ia IIC T5/T6 —Intrinsic Safety
Dust
DIP A21 T5
Gas
Ex d IIC T5/T6(1) —Flameproof
Dust
DIP A21 T5
Entity Rating
Ui = 30 V
Ii = 226 mA
Ci = 5 nF
Li = 0.55 mH
Pi = 1.4 W
−−−
Temperature Code
Enclosure
Rating
T5(Tamb v 80C)
T6 (Tamb v 75C)
IP66
T5(Tamb v 80C)
T6 (Tamb v 75C)
IP66
1. Except acetylene.
Educational Services
For information on available courses for the DVC6000
Series digital valve controller, as well as a variety of
other products, contact:
Emerson Process Management
Educational Services, Registration
P.O. Box 190; 301 S. 1st Ave.
Marshalltown, IA 50158−2823
Phone: 800−338−8158 or
Phone: 641−754−3771
FAX: 641−754−3431
e-mail: [email protected]
May 2007
1-7
1
DVC6000 SIS
1
1-8
May 2007
Installation
2-2
Section 2 Installation
Special Instructions for Safe Use and
Installations in Hazardous Areas
2
CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
ATEX Intrinsic Safety, Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
ATEX Flameproof, Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
ATEX Type n, Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
IECEx, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
NEPSI, Intrinsic Safety, Dust and Flameproof, Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Mounting
Type DVC6010 on Sliding-Stem Actuators (up to 4 inches travel) . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Type DVC6020 on Long-Stroke
Sliding-Stem Actuators (4 to 24 inches travel) and Rotary Actuators . . . . . . .
2-7
Type DVC6030 on Quarter-Turn Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
67CFR Filter Regulator
Integral-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yoke-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Casing-Mounted Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
2-11
2-12
Pneumatic Connections
Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Acting Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double-Acting Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
2-13
2-13
Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Electrical Connections
4 to 20 mA Loop Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Test Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
Communication Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
Wiring Practices
Logic Solver or Control System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
May 2007
2-17
2-17
2-1
DVC6000 SIS
2
2-2
Compliance Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
Maximum Cable Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
Installation in a Safety Instrumented System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Installation in a 4-Wire System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Installation in a 2-Wire System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
LCP100 (Local Control Panel) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
May 2007
Installation
Installation
After reading and understanding these special
conditions of use, proceed with mounting procedures.
WARNING
WARNING
Avoid personal injury or property
damage from sudden release of
process pressure or bursting of parts.
Before proceeding with any
Installation procedures:
Always wear protective clothing,
gloves, and eyewear to prevent
personal injury.
Disconnect any operating lines
providing air pressure, electric power,
or a control signal to the actuator. Be
sure the actuator cannot suddenly
open or close the valve.
Use bypass valves or completely
shut off the process to isolate the
valve from process pressure. Relieve
process pressure from both sides of
the valve.
Vent the pneumatic actuator
loading pressure and relieve any
actuator spring precompression.
Use lock-out procedures to be
sure that the above measures stay in
effect while you work on the
equipment.
Check with your process or
safety engineer for any additional
measures that must be taken to
protect against process media.
WARNING
To avoid static discharge from the
plastic cover, do not rub or clean the
cover with solvents. To do so could
result in an explosion. Clean with a
mild detergent and water only.
Failure to follow these conditions of
safe use could result in personal injury
or property damage from fire or
explosion, or area re-classification.
2
CSA
Special Conditions of Safe Use
No special conditions for safe use.
Refer to table 1-4 for approval information, figure 11-1
for the CSA loop schematic, and figure 11-2 for the
CSA nameplate.
FM
Special Conditions of Safe Use
No special conditions for safe use.
Refer to table 1-5 for approval information, figure 11-3
for the FM loop schematic, and figure 11-4 for FM
nameplate.
ATEX Intrinsic Safety, Dust
Special Conditions for Safe Use
1. This apparatus can only be connected to an
intrinsically safe certified equipment and this
combination must be compatible as regards the
intrinsically safe rules.
2. The electrical parameters of this equipment must
not exceed any following values:
UOv 30 V; IO v226 mA; POv 1.4 W
3. Operating ambient temperature: −40C to + 80C
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,
and figure 11-5 for the ATEX Intrinsic Safety, Dust
nameplate.
ATEX Flameproof, Dust
Special Instructions for Safe Use and
Installations in Hazardous Locations
Certain nameplates may carry more than one
approval, and each approval may have unique
installation requirements and/or conditions of safe use.
Special instructions are listed by agency/approval.
May 2007
Special Conditions for Safe Use
Operating ambient temperature: −40C to + 85C
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,
and figure 11-6 for ATEX Flameproof, Dust
nameplate.
2-3
DVC6000 SIS
ATEX Type n, Dust
Special Conditions for Safe Use
Operating ambient temperature: −40C to + 80C
Refer to table 1-6 for additional approval information,
and figure 11-7 for ATEX Type n, Dust nameplate.
2
IECEx Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof
Conditions of Certification
Ex ia / Ex d / Ex n
1. Warning: Electrostatic charge hazard. Do not
rub or clean with solvents. To do so could result
in an explosion.
4. The maximum operating ambient temperature
range of the controller is −40C to +80C.
5. The principle of “Opening equipment’s cover is
allowed only after the power is off ” must be abided by
when using and maintaining the controller in the field.
6. The values for intrinsically safe parameters of the
controller (Intrinsically safe type) are as follow:
Ui = 30V, Ii = 226mA, Pi = 1.4W, Ci = 5nF,
Li = 0.55mH
7. While the controller forms an intrinsically safe
explosion protection system together with a
corresponding associated equipment safety barrier,
the following requirements must be met: Uo vUi , Io
vIi, Po vPi , Co wCi + Cc, Lo wLi + Lc
EX d / Ex n
2. Do not open while energized.
Refer to table 1-7 for additional approval information,
and figure 11-8 for the IECEx nameplate.
NEPSI Intrinsic Safety, Dust and
Flameproof, Dust
Notes for Safe Use of the Certified Product
DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers (designated
as controller hereafter) have been proved to be in
conformity with the requirements specified in the
national standards GB3836.1-2000, GB3836.2-2000,
GB3836.4-2000, and GB12476.1-2000 through
inspections conducted by National Supervision and
Inspection Centre for Explosion Protection and Safety
of Instrumentation (NEPSI). The Ex markings for the
products are Ex d II CT5 (acetylene not included),
DIPA21T5 or Ex ia II CT5, DIPA21T5 respectively and
their Ex certificate numbers are GYJ04504 and
GYJ04505. When using the product , the user should
pay attention to the items stated below:
1. The specific product types of approved DVC6000
Series digital valve controllers this time are DVC6010,
DVC6020 and DVC6030.
2. The enclosure of the controller provides a
grounding terminal, and the user should install a
reliable grounding wire connected to it when mounting
and using the controller.
3. The controller’s cable entrance (1/2 NPT) must be
fitted with a cable entry device which is Ex-approved
through inspection of explosion protection, in
conformity with relevant standards of GB3836 and has
a corresponding rating of explosion protection.
2-4
Note
Where Cc and Lc represent distributing
capacitance and inductance of the
connecting cable respectively.
8. The safety barrier must be placed at safety
location, and the instruction manuals of both the
product and fitted safety barrier must be followed while
conducting system wiring and using the product; The
connecting cable should be a shield cable with the
area of core section being greater than 0.5mm2 and its
shield (or insulation screen) being grounded at a safe
location and insulated from the product enclosure; The
cable should be routed so that the electro-magnetic
interference can be eliminated as much as possible
and that the cable distributing parameters of
capacitance and inductance can be controlled within
0.06mF/1mH.
9. The user must not be allowed to replace the
internal electric components of the product and
change the condition of system wiring at will and on
his own.
10. The user must follow the relevant rules specified
by the product instruction manual, the “15th Section of
Electric Equipment Used in Explosive Gaseous
Environment: Electric Installation in Hazardous
Locations (except for coal mine)” of GB3836.15-2000
standard, the “Design Code for Electric Power
Installation in Explosive and Fire-hazardous
Environment” of GB50058-1992 standard, and the
“Safety Regulations against dust explosion” of
GB15577-1995 standard while performing installation,
operation, and maintenance for the product.
Refer to table 1-8 for additional approval information,
and figure 11-9 for the NEPSI nameplate.
May 2007
Installation
CAP SCREW, FLANGED
2
MACHINE SCREW
SHIELD
ADJUSTMENT ARM
CONNECTOR ARM
CAP SCREW
PLAIN WASHER
29B1674-A / DOC
Figure 2-1. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Sliding-Stem Actuators with up to 2 Inches Travel
Mounting
WARNING
Refer to the Installation WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Type DVC6010 on Sliding-Stem
Actuators Up to 102 mm (4 Inches) of
Travel
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator. See the instructions that
come with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific
actuator model.
The Type DVC6010 digital valve controller mounts on
sliding-stem actuators with up to 102 mm (4-inch)
travel. Figure 2-1 shows a typical mounting on an
May 2007
actuator with up to 51 mm (2-inch) travel. Figure 2-2
shows a typical mounting on actuators with 51 to 102
mm (2- to 4-inch) travel. For actuators with greater
than 102 mm (4-inch) travel, see the guidelines for
mounting a Type DVC6020 digital valve controller.
Refer to the following guidelines when mounting
on sliding-stem actuators with up to 4 inches of
travel. Where a key number is referenced, refer to
figure 10-1.
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the actuator,
releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use lock-out
procedures to be sure that the above measures stay in
effect while you work on the equipment.
2. Attach the connector arm to the valve stem
connector.
3. Attach the mounting bracket to the digital valve
controller housing.
4. If valve travel exceeds 2 inches, a feedback arm
extension is attached to the existing 2-inch feedback
arm. Remove the existing bias spring (key 78) from
the 2-inch feedback arm (key 79). Attach the feedback
arm extension to the feedback arm (key 79) as shown
in figure 2-2.
2-5
DVC6000 SIS
HEX NUT
CAP SCREW, FLANGED
FEEDBACK ARM
EXTENSION,
BIAS SPRING
LOCK WASHER
ADJUSTMENT ARM
SPACER
MACHINE SCREW,
FLAT HEAD
2
HEX NUT, FLANGED
MACHINE SCREW
LOCK WASHER
SHIELD
MACHINE SCREW,
LOCK WASHER,
HEX NUT
PLAIN WASHER
CONNECTOR ARM
Figure 2-2. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Sliding-Stem Actuators with 2 to 4 Inches Travel
inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through the hole
on the feedback arm as follows:
A
For air-to-open actuators (i.e., the actuator
stem retracts into the actuator casing or cylinder as air
pressure to the casing or lower cylinder increases),
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘A’’. For
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates
counterclockwise, from A to B, as air pressure to the
casing or lower cylinder increases.
B
SPRING RELAXED
FEEDBACK ARM
BIAS SPRING
A
B
ADJUSTMENT
ARM PIN
BIAS SPRING
A7209/IL
SPRING UNDER TENSION OF
ADJUSTMENT ARM PIN
For air-to-close actuators (i.e., the actuator
stem extends from the actuator casing or cylinder as
air pressure to the casing or upper cylinder increases),
insert the alignment pin into the hole marked ‘‘B’’. For
this style actuator, the feedback arm rotates
clockwise, from B to A, as air pressure to the casing or
upper cylinder increases.
Note
When performing the following steps,
ensure there is enough clearance
between the adjustment arm and the
feedback arm to prevent interference
with the bias spring.
Figure 2-3. Locating Adjustment Arm Pin in Feedback Arm
5. Mount the digital valve controller on the actuator as
described in the mounting kit instructions.
6. Set the position of the feedback arm (key 79) on
the digital valve controller to the no air position by
2-6
7. Apply lubricant to the pin of the adjustment arm. As
shown in figure 2-3, place the pin into the slot of the
feedback arm or feedback arm extension so that the
bias spring loads the pin against the side of the arm
with the valve travel markings.
May 2007
Installation
CAM/ROLLER POSITION MARK
LOCK WASHER
CAP SCREW
CAP SCREW, HEX
SOCKET
A
PLAIN WASHER
HEX NUT
2
STUD, CONT
THREAD
CAM
MOUNTING PLATE
VENT
STUD, CONT THREAD
HEX NUT
29B1665-B / DOC
VENT ADAPTOR
A
PLAIN WASHER
SECTION A-A
SPACER
Figure 2-4. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Long-Stroke Sliding-Stem Actuator.
8. Install the external lock washer on the adjustment
arm. Position the adjustment arm in the slot of the
connector arm and loosely install the flanged hex nut.
9. Slide the adjustment arm pin in the slot of the
connector arm until the pin is in line with the desired
valve travel marking. Tighten the flanged hex nut.
will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator. See the instructions that
come with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific
actuator model.
10. Remove the alignment pin (key 46) and store it in
the module base next to the I/P assembly.
11. After calibrating the instrument, attach the shield
with two machine screws.
Type DVC6020 on Long-Stroke (4 to 24
Inch Travel) Sliding-Stem Actuators and
Rotary Actuators
WARNING
Refer to the Installation WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
May 2007
Note
All cams supplied with FIELDVUE
mounting kits are characterized to
provide a linear response.
Type DVC6020 digital valve controllers use a cam
(designed for linear response) and roller as the
feedback mechanism. Figure 2-4 shows an example of
mounting on sliding-stem actuators with travels from 4
inches to 24 inches. Some long-stroke applications will
require an actuator with a tapped lower yoke boss.
Figures 2-5 and 2-7 show the Type DVC6020
mounted on rotary actuators.
As shown in figure 2-5, two feedback arms are
available for the digital valve controller. Most
long-stroke sliding-stem and rotary actuator
installations use the long feedback arm [62 mm (2.45
inches) from roller to pivot point]. Installations on
2-7
DVC6000 SIS
MACHINE SCREW
MOUNTING ADAPTOR
CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET
CAP SCREW,
HEX SOCKET
2
CAM
MACHINE SCREW
29B1672-A / DOC
CAM
29B2094-A / DOC
TYPICAL MOUNTING WITH SHORT FEEDBACK ARM
(FISHER TYPE 1052 SIZE 33 ACTUATOR SHOWN)
TYPICAL MOUNTING WITH LONG FEEDBACK ARM
(FISHER TYPE 1061 SIZE 30−68 ACTUATOR SHOWN)
Figure 2-5. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Rotary Actuator
Fisher Type 1051 size 33 and Type 1052 size 20 and
33 actuators use the short feedback arm [54 mm (2.13
inches) from roller to pivot point]. Make sure the
correct feedback arm is installed on the digital valve
controller before beginning the mounting procedure.
Refer to figures 2-4, 2-5, and 2-7 for parts locations.
Also, where a key number is referenced, refer to figure
10-2. Refer to the following guidelines when mounting
on sliding-stem actuators with 4 to 24 inches of travel
or on rotary actuators:
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the
pneumatic actuator, releasing all pressure from the
actuator. Use lock-out procedures to be sure that the
above measures stay in effect while working on the
equipment.
2. If a cam is not already installed on the actuator,
install the cam as described in the instructions
included with the mounting kit. For sliding-stem
actuators, the cam is installed on the stem connector.
3. If a mounting plate is required, fasten the mounting
plate to the actuator.
4. For applications that require remote venting, a
pipe-away bracket kit is available. Follow the
instructions included with the kit to replace the existing
mounting bracket on the digital valve controller with
2-8
the pipe-away bracket and to transfer the feedback
parts from the existing mounting bracket to the
pipe-away bracket.
5. Larger size actuators may require a follower arm
extension, as shown in figure 2-7. If required, the
follower arm extension is included in the mounting kit.
Follow the instructions included with the mounting kit
to install the follower arm extension.
6. Mount the Type DVC6020 on the actuator as
follows:
If required, a mounting adaptor is included in the
mounting kit. Attach the adaptor to the actuator as
shown in figure 2-5. Then attach the digital valve
controller assembly to the adaptor. The roller on the
digital valve controller feedback arm will contact the
actuator cam as it is being attached.
If no mounting adaptor is required, attach the
digital valve controller assembly to the actuator or
mounting plate. The roller on the digital valve
controller feedback arm will contact the actuator cam
as it is being attached.
7. For long-stroke sliding-stem actuators, after the
mounting is complete, check to be sure the roller
aligns with the position mark on the cam (see
figure 2-4). If necessary, reposition the cam to attain
alignment.
May 2007
Installation
MOUNTING BRACKET
FEEDBACK ARM
TRAVEL INDICATOR PIN
2
29B1703-A / DOC
SPACER
TRAVEL INDICATOR
19B3879−A / DOC
Figure 2-6. Mounting a Type DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller on a Rotary Actuator (Type 1032 Size 425A Shown)
FOLLOWER ARM
EXTENSION
MACHINE SCREW,
LOCK WASHER,
HEX NUT
CAP SCREW,
HEX SOCKET
If ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
actuator, makes pneumatic connections to the
actuator, sets up, and calibrates the instrument. If you
purchased the digital valve controller separately, you
will need a mounting kit to mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator. See the instructions that
come with the mounting kit for detailed information on
mounting the digital valve controller to a specific
actuator model.
Figure 2-6 shows the Type DVC6030 digital valve
controller mounted on a quarter-turn actuator. Refer to
figure 2-6 for parts locations. Refer to the following
guidelines when mounting on quarter-turn actuators:
CAP SCREW
29B1673-A / DOC
CAM
Figure 2-7. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller with Long
Feedback Arm and Follower Arm Extension Mounted on a Rotary
Actuator
Type DVC6030 on Quarter-Turn
Actuators
WARNING
Refer to the Installation WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
May 2007
Note
Due to NAMUR mounting limitations,
do not use the heavier stainless steel
Type DVC6030S in vibration service.
1. Isolate the control valve from the process line
pressure and release pressure from both sides of the
valve body. Shut off all pressure lines to the pneumatic
actuator, releasing all pressure from the actuator. Use
lock-out procedures to be sure that the above
measures stay in effect while working on the
equipment.
2. If necessary, remove the existing hub from the
actuator shaft.
2-9
DVC6000 SIS
STARTING POSITION OF TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY (DIGITAL
VALVE CONTROLLER OUTPUT A
AT 0 PSI. )
IN THIS POSITION, THE “B” HOLE
IN THE FEEDBACK ARM WILL BE
ALIGNED WITH THE REFERENCE
HOLE IN THE DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLERS HOUSING.
E0989 / DOC
2
DVC6030 FEEDBACK
ARM MOVEMENT
MOVEMENT OF TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY WITH
INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
OUTPUT A.
ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
STARTING POSITION OF THE ACTUATOR TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING PRESSURE
FROM OUTPUT A DRIVES THE INDICATOR
COUNTERCLOCKWISE (THE POTENTIOMETER
SHAFT WILL ROTATE CLOCKWISE AS VIEWED
FROM THE BACK OF THE FIELDVUE INSTRUMENT)
19B3879-A / DOC-1
Figure 2-8. Explanation of Travel Indicator Starting Position and Movement, if Clockwise Orientation is Selected for
“Travel Sensor Motion” in AMS ValveLink Software or the 375 Field Communicator
3. If a positioner plate is required, attach the
positioner plate to the actuator as described in the
mounting kit instructions.
4. If required, attach the spacer to the actuator shaft.
Refer to figures 2-8 and 2-9. The travel indicator
assembly can have a starting position of 7:30 or
10:30. Determine the desired starting position then
proceed with the next step. Considering the top of the
digital valve controller as the 12 o’clock position, in the
next step attach the travel indicator, so that the pin is
positioned as follows:
If increasing pressure from the digital valve
controller output A rotates the potentiometer shaft
clockwise (as viewed from the back of the
instrument), mount the travel indicator assembly such
that the arrow is in the 10:30 position, as shown in
figure 2-8.
If increasing pressure from the digital valve
controller output A rotates the potentiometer shaft
counterclockwise (as viewed from the back of the
instrument), mount the travel indicator assembly such
that the arrow is in the 7:30 position, as shown in
figure 2-9.
2-10
Note
AMS ValveLink Software and the 375
Field Communicator use the
convention of clockwise (figure 2-8)
and counterclockwise (figure 2-9)
when viewing the potentiometer shaft
from the back of the FIELDVUE
instrument.
5. Attach the travel indicator, to the shaft connector or
spacer as described in the mounting kit instructions.
6. Attach the mounting bracket to the digital valve
controller.
7. Position the digital valve controller so that the pin
on the travel indicator engages the slot in the feedback
arm and that the bias spring loads the pin as shown in
figure 2-10. Attach the digital valve controller to the
actuator or positioner plate.
8. If a travel indicator scale is included in the
mounting kit, attach the scale as described in the
mounting kit instructions.
May 2007
Installation
MOVEMENT OF TRAVEL
INDICATOR ASSEMBLY WITH
INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
OUTPUT A.
2
E0989
DVC6030 FEEDBACK
ARM MOVEMENT
19B3879-A / DOC-2
STARTING POSITION OF
TRAVEL INDICATOR ASSEMBLY
(DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER
OUTPUT A AT 0 PSI).
IN THIS POSITION, THE “A” HOLE
IN THE FEEDBACK ARM WILL BE
ALIGNED WITH THE REFERENCE
HOLE IN THE DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLERS HOUSING.
ACTUATOR SHAFT MOVEMENT
STARTING POSITION OF THE TRAVEL INDICATOR
ASSEMBLY IF INCREASING PRESSURE FROM
OUTPUT A DRIVES THE INDICATOR CLOCKWISE
THE POTENTIOMETER SHAFT WILL ROTATE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE AS VIEWED FROM THE
BACK OF THE FIELDVUE INSTRUMENT.
Figure 2-9. Explanation of Travel Indicator Starting Position and Movement if Counterclockwise Orientation is Selected for
“Travel Sensor Motion” in AMS ValveLink Software or the 375 Field Communicator
Mounting the Type 67CFR Filter
Regulator
HOLE A
HOLE B
A Type 67CFR filter regulator, when used with the
DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers, can be
mounted three ways.
Integral-Mounted Regulator
Refer to figure 2-11. Lubricate an O-ring and insert it
in the recess around the SUPPLY connection on the
digital valve controller. Attach the Type 67CFR filter
regulator to the side of the digital valve controller.
Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the
unused outlet on the filter regulator. This is the
standard method of mounting the filter regulator.
TRAVEL
INDICATOR PIN
48B4164-B / DOC
FEEDBACK ARM
BIAS SPRING
Figure 2-10. Positioning Travel Indicator Pin in the Feedback Arm
(Viewed as if Looking from the Type DVC6030
toward the Actuator)
May 2007
Yoke-Mounted Regulator
Mount the filter regulator with 2 cap screws to the
pre-drilled and tapped holes in the actuator yoke.
Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the
unused outlet on the filter regulator. The O-ring is not
required.
2-11
DVC6000 SIS
TYPE 67CFR
2
CAP SCREWS
NOTE:
APPLY LUBRICANT
1
W8077-1 SIS
O-RING
1
SUPPLY CONNECTION
Figure 2-11. Mounting the Type 67CFR Regulator on a DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller
Casing-Mounted Regulator
Use the separate Type 67CFR filter regulator casing
mounting bracket provided with the filter regulator.
Attach the mounting bracket to the Type 67CFR and
then attach this assembly to the actuator casing.
Thread a 1/4-inch socket-head pipe plug into the
unused outlet on the filter regulator. The O-ring is not
required.
1/2 NPT
CONDUIT
CONNECTIONS
(BOTH SIDES)
OUTPUT A
CONNECTION
SUPPLY
CONNECTION
Pressure Connections
OUTPUT B
CONNECTION
WARNING
Refer to the Installation WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Note
Make pressure connections to the
digital valve controller using tubing
with at least 3/8-inch diameter.
Pressure connections are shown in figure 2-12. All
pressure connections on the digital valve controller are
1/4 NPT internal connections. Use 10 mm (3/8-inch)
tubing for all pneumatic connections. If remote venting
is required, refer to the vent subsection.
2-12
W7963 SIS
Figure 2-12. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller
Connections
Supply Connections
WARNING
To avoid personal injury and property
damage resulting from bursting of
parts, do not exceed maximum supply
pressure.
May 2007
Installation
WARNING
Severe personal injury or property
damage may occur from an
uncontrolled process if the
instrument air supply is not clean, dry
and oil-free. While use and regular
maintenance of a filter that removes
particles larger than 40 microns in
diameter will suffice in most
applications, check with an Emerson
Process Management field office and
industry instrument air quality
standards for use with corrosive air or
if you are unsure about the proper
amount or method of air filtration or
filter maintenance.
Supply pressure must be clean, dry air that meets the
requirements of ISA Standard 7.0.01. For additional
information on supply refer to the SIS Safety Manual,
Form 5743.
A Fisher Type 67CFR filter regulator, or equivalent,
may be used to filter and regulate supply air. A filter
regulator can be integrally mounted onto the side of
the digital valve controller, casing mounted separate
from the digital valve controller, or mounted on the
actuator mounting boss. Supply and output pressure
gauges may be supplied on the digital valve controller.
The output pressure gauges can be used as an aid for
calibration.
Connect the nearest suitable supply source to the
1/4 NPT IN connection on the filter regulator (if
furnished) or to the 1/4 NPT SUPPLY connection on
the digital valve controller housing (if Type 67CFR
filter regulator is not attached).
Output Connections
A factory mounted digital valve controller has its
output piped to the pneumatic input connection on the
actuator. If mounting the digital valve controller in the
field, connect the 1/4 NPT digital valve controller
output connections to the pneumatic actuator input
connections.
Single-Acting Actuators
When using a single-acting direct digital valve
controller (relay type A or C) on a single-acting
actuator always connect OUTPUT A to the actuator
pneumatic input. Only when using relay type C in the
special application (i.e. solenoid health monitoring) do
you need to connect OUTPUT B to the monitoring line.
May 2007
2
W9131-1
Figure 2-13. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on
Type 585C Piston Actuator
When using a single-acting reverse digital valve
controller (relay type B) on a single-acting actuator
always connect OUTPUT B to the actuator pneumatic
input. Only when using relay type B in the special
application (i.e. solenoid health monitoring) do you
need to connect OUTPUT A to the monitoring line.
Double-Acting Actuators
DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers on
double-acting actuators always use relay type A.
When the relay adjustment disc is properly set,
OUTPUT A will vent to the atmosphere and OUTPUT
B will fill to supply pressure when power is removed
from the positioner.
To have the actuator stem extend from the cylinder
with increasing input current, connect OUTPUT A to
the upper actuator cylinder connection and connect
OUTPUT B to the lower cylinder connection. Figure
2-13 shows a digital valve controller connected to a
double-acting piston actuator that will extend the stem
with increasing input current.
To have the actuator stem retract into the cylinder with
increasing input current, connect OUTPUT A to the
lower cylinder connection and OUTPUT B to the upper
cylinder connection.
2-13
DVC6000 SIS
24/48 VDC
110/220 VAC, etc.
CONTROL SIGNAL
(4−20 mA, 0−20 mA,
0−24 VDC)
CONTROL LINE
2
Port A
Port B
DVC6000 SIS DIGITAL VALVE
CONTROLLER WITH RELAY C
SUPPLY PRESSURE
MONITORING LINE
E1048
SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR
Figure 2-14. Pneumatic Hookup for Solenoid Testing
Special Construction to Support Logic
Solver Initiated Solenoid Valve Health
Monitoring
In single-acting actuator applications with a solenoid
valve installed, the DVC6000 can be configured to
monitor the health of the solenoid valve test, which is
initiated by the Logic Solver. This is accomplished by
connecting the unused output port B from the
DVC6000 to the pneumatic monitoring line between
the solenoid valve and the actuator, as shown in figure
2-14. When single-acting, direct relay C is installed,
the “unused” output port is port B. When single-acting,
reverse relay B is used, the unused port is port A.
Note
This application is called “special
application” in the Setup Wizard relay
selection.
This configuration is not possible with
a double-acting actuator or when
using relay A in single-acting mode.
2-14
Vent
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
can occur from cover failure due to
overpressure. Ensure that the
housing vent opening is open and
free of debris to prevent pressure
buildup under the cover.
The relay output constantly bleeds supply air into the
area under the cover. The vent opening at the back of
the housing should be left open to prevent pressure
buildup under the cover. If a remote vent is required,
the vent line must be as short as possible with a
minimum number of bends and elbows.
To connect a remote vent to Type DVC6010 and
DVC6030 digital valve controllers— remove the
plastic vent (key 52, figure 10-1). The vent connection
is 3/8 NPT internal. At a minimum, 12.7 mm (1/2-inch)
tubing should be used when installing a remote vent to
prevent excessive pressure from building up under the
cover.
To connect a remote vent to Type DVC6020 digital
valve controllers— Replace the standard mounting
bracket (key 74, figure10-2) with the vent-away
bracket (key 74). Install a pipe plug in the vent-away
mounting bracket (key 74). Mount the digital valve
controller on the actuator as described in the
May 2007
Installation
Installation section of this manual. The vent
connection is 3/8 NPT internal. At a minimum, 12.7
mm (1/2-inch) tubing should be used when installing a
remote vent to prevent excessive pressure from
building up under the cover.
SAFETY GROUND
TALK−
TALK+
2
Electrical Connections
EARTH GROUND
LOOP+
39B3399-B Sheet 2
LOOP−
WARNING
Refer to the Installation WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
To avoid personal injury resulting
from electrical shock, do not exceed
the maximum input voltage specified
in table 1-2 of this instruction manual,
or on the product nameplate. If the
input voltage specified differs, do not
exceed the lowest specified maximum
input voltage.
Select wiring and/or cable glands that
are rated for the environment of use
(such as hazardous area, ingress
protection, and temperature). Failure
to use properly rated wiring and/or
cable glands can result in personal
injury or property damage from fire or
explosion.
Figure 2-15. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller
Terminal Box
4 to 20 mA Loop Connections
The digital valve controller is normally powered by a
control system output card. The use of shielded cable
will ensure proper operation in electrically noisy
environments.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or property
damage from the sudden release of
process pressure, be sure the valve is
not controlling the process. The valve
may move when the source is applied.
Wire the digital valve controller as follows: (unless
indicated otherwise, refer to figures 10-1 through 10-3
for identification of parts).
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or property
damage caused by fire or explosion,
remove power to the instrument
before removing the terminal box
cover in an area which contains a
potentially explosive atmosphere or
has been classified as hazardous.
May 2007
1. Remove the terminal box cap (key 4) from the
terminal box (key 3).
2. Bring the field wiring into the terminal box. When
applicable, install conduit using local and national
electrical codes which apply to the application.
3. Refer to figure 2-15. Connect the control system
output card positive wire ‘‘current output’’ to the LOOP
+ screw terminal in the terminal box. Connect the
control system output card negative (or return) wire to
the LOOP − screw terminal.
2-15
DVC6000 SIS
WARNING
2
Test connections inside the terminal box can be used
to measure loop current across a 1 ohm resistor.
Personal injury or property damage,
caused by fire or explosion, can
result from the discharge of static
electricity. Connect a 14 AWG (2.08
mm2) ground strap between the
digital valve controller and earth
ground when flammable or
hazardous gases are present. Refer
to national and local codes and
standards for grounding
requirements.
1. Remove the terminal box cap.
To avoid static discharge from the
plastic cover, do not rub or clean
the cover with solvents. Clean with
a mild detergent and water only.
Voltage (on test meter) 1000 = milliamps
2. Adjust the test meter to measure a range of 0.001
to 0.1 volts.
3. Connect the positive lead of the test meter to the
TEST + connection and the negative lead to the TEST
− connection inside the terminal box.
4. Measure Loop current as:
example:
Test meter Voltage X 1000 = Loop Milliamps
4. As shown in figure 2-15, two ground terminals are
available for connecting a safety ground, earth ground,
or drain wire. These ground terminals are electrically
identical. Make connections to these terminals
following national and local codes and plant standards.
5. Replace and hand tighten the terminal box cap.
When the loop is ready for startup, apply power to the
control system output card.
0.004 X1000 = 4.0 milliamperes
0.020 X 1000 = 20.0 milliamperes
5. Remove test leads and replace the terminal box
cover.
Communication Connections
Note
When the DVC6000 SIS is operating
under normal conditions at 4 mA (trip
condition is 20 mA) be sure to apply
no less than 4 mA.
Test Connections
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
caused by fire or explosion may occur
if this connection is attempted in a
potentially explosive atmosphere, or
in an area that has been classified as
hazardous. Confirm that area
classification and atmosphere
conditions permit the safe removal of
the terminal box cap before
proceeding.
2-16
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
caused by fire or explosion may occur
if this connection is attempted in a
potentially explosive atmosphere or in
an area that has been classified as
hazardous. Confirm that area
classification and atmosphere
conditions permit the safe removal of
the terminal box cap before
proceeding.
A HART communicating device, such as a Model 375
Field Communicator or a personal computer running
AMS ValveLink Software communicating through a
HART modem, interfaces with the DVC6000 Series
digital valve controller from any wiring termination
May 2007
Installation
TOTAL LOOP
CABLE RESISTANCE
COMPLIANCE VOLTAGE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
+
−
INTRINSIC SAFETY
BARRIER
(if used)
HART
FILTER
R
Calculate Voltage Available at the Instrument as
follows:
Control system compliance voltage
– Filter voltage drop (if used)
+
−
VOLTAGE
AVAILABLE AT
THE
INSTRUMENT
2
Example Calculation
18.5 volts (at 21.05 mA)
1
– 2.3 volts (for HF300 series filter)
– Intrinsic safety barrier resistance (if used) x maximum loop current
– 2.55 volts (121 ohms x 0.02105 amps)
– Total loop cable resistance x maximum loop
current
– 1.01 volts (48 ohms x 0.02105 amps for
1000 feet of Belden 9501 cable)
= Voltage available at the instrument
2
= 15.19 volts available—if safety barrier (2.55 volts)
is not used
NOTES:
1
Obtain filter voltage drop. The measured drop will be different than this value. The measured filter voltage drop
depends upon control system output voltage, the intrinsic safety barrier (if used), and the instrument. See note 2.
2
The voltage available at the instrument is not the voltage measured at the instrument terminals. Once the instrument is
connected, the instrument limits the measured voltage to approximately 9.0 to 10.5 volts.
Figure 2-16. Determining Voltage Available at the Instrument
point in the 4–20 mA loop. If you choose to connect
the HART communicating device directly to the
instrument, attach the device to the LOOP + and
LOOP − terminals or to the TALK + and TALK −
connections inside the terminal box to provide local
communications with the instrument.
connected. The voltage measured at the instrument is
limited by the instrument and is typically less than the
voltage available.
As shown in figure 2-16, the voltage available at the
instrument depends upon:
the control system compliance voltage
if a filter or intrinsic safety barrier is used, and
Wiring Practices
Logic Solver or Control System
Requirements
There are several parameters that should be checked
to ensure the Logic Solver or control system are
compatible with the DVC6000 Series digital valve
controller.
Voltage Available
The voltage available at the DVC6000 Series digital
valve controller must be at least 11 VDC. The voltage
available at the instrument is not the actual voltage
measured at the instrument when the instrument is
May 2007
the wire type and length.
The control system compliance voltage is the
maximum voltage at the control system output
terminals at which the control system can produce
maximum loop current.
The voltage available at the instrument may be
calculated from the following equation:
Voltage Available = [Control System Compliance
Voltage (at maximum current)] − [filter voltage drop (if
a HART filter is used)] − [total cable resistance maximum current] − [barrier resistance x maximum
current].
The calculated voltage available should be greater
than or equal to 11 VDC.
Table 2-1 lists the resistance of some typical cables.
2-17
DVC6000 SIS
The following example shows how to calculate the
voltage available for a Honeywell TDC2000 control
system with a Type HF340 HART filter, and 1000 feet
of Belden 9501 cable:
Voltage available = [18.5 volts (at 21.05 mA)] − [2.3
volts] − [48 ohms 0.02105 amps]
Voltage available = [18.5] − [2.3] − [1.01]
2
Voltage available = 15.19 volts
Compliance Voltage
If the compliance voltage of the control system is not
known, perform the following compliance voltage test.
1. Disconnect the field wiring from the control system
and connect equipment as shown in figure 2-17 to the
control system terminals.
2. Set the control system to provide maximum output
current.
3. Increase the resistance of the 1 KΩ potentiometer,
shown in figure 2-17, until the current observed on the
milliammeter begins to drop quickly.
4. Record the voltage shown on the voltmeter. This is
the control system compliance voltage.
For specific parameter information relating to your
control system, contact your Emerson Process
Management sales office.
2-18
Maximum Cable Capacitance
The maximum cable length for HART communication
is limited by the characteristic capacitance of the
cable. Maximum length due to capacitance can be
calculated using the following formulas:
Length(ft) = [160,000 − Cmaster(pF)] [Ccable(pF/ft)]
Length(m) = [160,000 − Cmaster(pF)] [Ccable(pF/m)]
where:
160,000 = a constant derived for FIELDVUE
instruments to insure that the HART network RC time
constant will be no greater than 0.65 μs (per the HART
specification).
Cmaster = the capacitance of the control system or
HART filter
Ccable = the capacitance of the cable used (see
table 2-1)
The following example shows how to calculate the
cable length for a Foxboro I/A control system (1988)
with a Cmaster of 50, 000 pF and a Belden 9501 cable
with characteristic capacitance of 50pF/ft.
Length(ft) = [160,000 − 50,000pF] [50pF/ft]
Length = 2200 ft.
The HART communication cable length is limited by
the cable characteristic capacitance. To increase
cable length, select a wire with lower capacitance per
foot. Contact your Emerson Process Management
sales office for specific information relating to your
control system.
May 2007
Installation
Table 2-1. Cable Characteristics
Capacitance(1)
pF/ft
Cable Type
Capacitance(1)
pF/m
Resistance(2)
Ohms/ft
Resistance(2)
Ohms/m
BS5308/1, 0.5 sq mm
61.0
200
0.022
0.074
BS5308/1, 1.0 sq mm
61.0
200
0.012
0.037
BS5308/1, 1.5 sq mm
61.0
200
0.008
0.025
BS5308/2, 0.5 sq mm
121.9
400
0.022
0.074
BS5308/2, 0.75 sq mm
121.9
400
0.016
0.053
BS5308/2, 1.5 sq mm
121.9
400
0.008
0.025
BELDEN 8303, 22 awg
63.0
206.7
0.030
0.098
BELDEN 8441, 22 awg
83.2
273
0.030
0.098
BELDEN 8767, 22 awg
76.8
252
0.030
0.098
BELDEN 8777, 22 awg
54.9
180
0.030
0.098
BELDEN 9501, 24 awg
50.0
164
0.048
0.157
BELDEN 9680, 24 awg
27.5
90.2
0.048
0.157
BELDEN 9729, 24 awg
22.1
72.5
0.048
0.157
BELDEN 9773, 18 awg
54.9
0.012
0.042
BELDEN 9829, 24 awg
27.1
0.048
0.157
BELDEN 9873, 20 awg
54.9
0.020
0.069
180
88.9
180
2
1. The capacitance values represent capacitance from one conductor to all other conductors and shield. This is the appropriate value to use in the cable length calculations.
2. The resistance values include both wires of the twisted pair.
1 KW POTENTIOMETER
MILLIAMMETER
VOLTMETER
CIRCUIT
UNDER
TEST
A6192-1/IL
Figure 2-17. Voltage Test Schematic
May 2007
2-19
DVC6000 SIS
Installation in a Safety Instrumented
System
2
A DVC6000 SIS instrument may be used in a Safety
Instrumented System (SIS) to control operation of a
safety block valve or vent valve. The actuator may be
either single-acting or double-acting with spring return.
DVC6000 SIS instruments will have the label shown in
figure 2-18 on the terminal box cover.
The digital valve controller may be installed with a
solenoid valve in either a 4-wire system, (figure 2-20),
in a 2-wire system (figure 2-21), or a 2-wire system
without a solenoid valve (figure 2-22). The digital valve
controller ships from the factory with the DIP switch on
the printed wiring board set to the correct position per
the ordered option.
When operating with a 4−20 mA current signal, the
digital valve controller must be setup for point-to-point
operation. When operating with a voltage signal, the
digital valve controller must be setup for multidrop
operation. The operational mode is determined by a
DIP switch on the printed wiring board. As shown in
figure 2-19, the nameplate indicates the operational
mode set on the printed wiring board at the factory.
For information on verifying or changing the switch
position, refer to Replacing the PWB Assembly and
Setting the DIP Switch and table 9-3 in the
Maintenance section.
Installation in a 4-Wire System
Figure 2-20 is an example of the digital valve controller
installed in a 4-wire system. In this installation, two
separate signals are used: a 4−20 mA DC signal (from
the Logic Solver or DCS) for the digital valve controller
and a 24 VDC signal (from the Logic Solver) for the
solenoid valve.
Note
When a solenoid valve operated by an
independent power supply is used
pneumatically in series with a
DVC6000, the power source could be
24/48 VDC, 110/220 VAC, etc. Power
supply is dependent on customer
specifications.
The digital valve controller control mode is set to
“analog”. When a shutdown condition exists, the logic
2-20
Figure 2-18. Terminal Box Cover Label on DVC6000 Digital Valve
Controllers with Instrument Level SIS
E0768
INFORMATION IN THIS AREA INDICATES THE
OPERATIONAL MODE SET AT THE FACTORY.
PT-PT INDICATES POINT-TO-POINT LOOP,
MULTI INDICATES MULTI-DROP LOOP
Figure 2-19. Typical Digital Valve Controller Nameplate
solver (or DCS) activates the solenoid valve and also
cuts the current to the digital valve controller to 0 or 4
mA, thus causing the valve to move to its zero travel
position. In this installation, the switch on the digital
valve controller printed wiring board must be set for
point-to-point operation.
To set the digital valve controller control mode in an
SIS 4-wire system, from the Online menu select
Setup, Basic Setup, and Setup Wizard.
The Setup Wizard will automatically setup the
instrument for a 4-wire installation based upon the
printed wiring board DIP switch setting.
Installation in a 2-Wire System
Figures 2-21 and 2-22 are examples of the digital
valve controller installed in a 2-wire system. In these
installations the logic solver provides a single 24 VDC
signal that powers both the digital valve controller and
the optional solenoid valve (a low power consumption
model such as the ASCO EF8316G303 or
EF8316G304). The digital valve controllers control
mode is set to “digital”. When a shutdown condition
exists, the logic solver cuts power to both the digital
valve controller and the solenoid valve (if connected),
causing the valve to move to it’s zero travel position. A
Type LC340 line conditioner is required to allow HART
communications over the segment. Alternatively, a
HART pass through multiplexer such as MTL or
Pepperl+Fuchs Elcon, may be used, eliminating the
need for a line conditioner when installed as per figure
2-22.
May 2007
Installation
VENT
LOGIC SOLVER
24 VDC OR
CUSTOMER SPECIFIED
POWER SUPPLY
2
VENT
PISTON ACTUATOR
VALVE DISC
FAILS CLOCKWISE
ON LOSS OF AIR
4-20 mA DC
(NORMALLY VALVE IS
FULLY OPEN WITH
20 mA SIGNAL TO DIGITAL
VALVE CONTROLLER)
NOTES:
1/4-18 NPT X 3/8 OD TUBING
ELECTRICAL WIRING
19B6913-B
19B6914-A
E0769-1
SUPPLY
PRINTED WIRING BOARD
DIP SWITCH SET FOR
POINT-TO-POINT (DOWN
POSITION)
DVC6000 SERIES DIGITAL
VALVE CONTROLLER
SINGLE-ACTING SPRING AND DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOR
OR PISTON ACTUATOR WITH SPRING RETURN
Figure 2-20. Example of DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Installed in a 4-Wire SIS System
Table 2-2. Maximum Loop Wire Resistance per Logic Solver
Output Voltage(2)
Logic Solver
Output
Voltage
(VDC)
24.00
23.75
23.50
23.25
23.00
Maximum
Loop Wire
Resistance
(Ohms)
32.0
27.0
22.0
17.0
12.0
22.75
22.50
7.0
2.0
Maximum Wire Length (feet)(1)
22 AWG
20 AWG
18 AWG
16 AWG
952
804
655
506
357
1429
1205
982
759
536
2381
2009
1637
1265
893
3175
2679
2183
1687
1190
208
60
313
89
521
149
694
198
1. Wire length includes both wires in a twisted pair.
2. Installation includes line conditioner and low power solenoid valve with a 20.4 volt
engagement voltage.
May 2007
Note
Use of a solenoid valve is optional,
and dependent on stroking speed and
other operating conditions.
The line conditioner introduces an approximate 2.0
volt drop in the SIS system wiring. If used with a low
power solenoid valve (such as the ASCO Model
EF8316G303 or EF8316G304) a guaranteed
engagement voltage of 20.4 volts at maximum
temperature must be used.
The solenoid valve (if connected) requires up to 42 mA
to pull in. The digital valve controller set for multidrop
operation draws approximately 8 mA. Based on these
conditions, table 2-2 lists the maximum loop wire
resistance permitted for various logic solver output
voltages. The table also lists maximum length of wire
of various gauges that may be used.
2-21
DVC6000 SIS
ASCO (LOW POWER CONSUMPTION)
SOLENOID VALVE
DE-ENERGIZED
EXTERNAL PILOT LOADING
GASKET COVER INTERNAL - COVERED
EXTERNAL - EXPOSED
LOGIC SOLVER
24VDC
TYPE LC340 LINE
CONDITIONER
VENT
1
2
VENT
PISTON ACTUATOR
VALVE DISC
FAILS CLOCKWISE
ON LOSS OF AIR
A
(NORMALLY VALVE IS
FULLY OPEN WITH
WITH VOLTAGE TO
DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER)
NOTES:
1/4-18 NPT X 3/8 OD TUBING
ELECTRICAL WIRING
1 AN AIR SUPPLY LINE IS NEEDED FOR AN
EXTERNAL PILOTED SOLENOID VALVE. CONTACT
YOUR EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT SALES
OFFICE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
B
PRINTED WIRING BOARD
DIP SWITCH SET FOR
MULTIDROP (UP POSITION)
SUPPLY
DVC6000 SERIES DIGITAL
VALVE CONTROLLER
SINGLE-ACTING SPRING AND DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOR
OR PISTON ACTUATOR WITH SPRING RETURN
19B6915-A
19B6917-A
E0770-1
Figure 2-21. Example of DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Installed in a 2-Wire SIS System
The line conditioner is intended for installation in a
control or marshalling cabinet near the logic solver
field wiring terminals. In some installations, such as
shown in figure 2-22, where no solenoid is used, a
HART pass-through multiplexer may be used without a
line conditioner. The LC340 line conditioner will be
needed when a low-power solenoid is connected to
the same 2-wire loop as the digital valve controller as
shown in figure 2-21.
2. Connect the digital valve controller LOOP +
terminal to the line conditioner FLD + terminal.
Make connections to the line conditioner as follows:
Using the digital valve controller in a 2-wire system
(multi-drop operation) with an ASCO low power
solenoid valve, model EF8316G303 or EF8316G304
(or an equivalent low power solenoid valve) requires a
line conditioner. Using a low power solenoid valve
requires a separate air supply. Ensure that the
solenoid valve’s “selection gasket” is in the “External
Position”. A minimum of 15 psi operating pressure
differential is required. For more information, refer to
the ASCO catalog or contact your Emerson Process
Management sales office.
CAUTION
Do not overtighten the wiring
connection terminals or subject them
to heavy lateral (pushing) loads. This
could damage the line conditioner.
1. Be sure the digital valve controller DIP switch is set
for multidrop operation.
2-22
3. Connect the digital valve controller LOOP −
terminal to the line conditioner FLD − terminal.
4. Connect the solenoid valve field terminals to the
line conditioner FLD + and − terminals.
5. Connect the logic solver output to the line
conditioner SYS + and − terminals.
See the separate FIELDVUE Type LC340 Line
Conditioner Instruction Manual - Form 5719 for
detailed installation information.
May 2007
Installation
LOGIC SOLVER
24VDC
TYPE LC340 LINE
CONDITIONER
2
PISTON ACTUATOR
VALVE DISC
FAILS CLOCKWISE
ON LOSS OF AIR
A
(NORMALLY VALVE IS
FULLY OPEN WITH
WITH VOLTAGE TO
DIGITAL VALVE CONTROLLER)
NOTES:
E1043
1/4-18 NPT X 3/8 OD TUBING
ELECTRICAL WIRING
SUPPLY
B
PRINTED WIRING BOARD
DIP SWITCH SET FOR
MULTIDROP (UP POSITION)
DVC6000 SERIES DIGITAL
VALVE CONTROLLER
SINGLE-ACTING SPRING AND DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOR
OR PISTON ACTUATOR WITH SPRING RETURN
Figure 2-22. Example of DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Installed in a 2-Wire SIS System (without a Solenoid Valve)
To set the digital valve controller Control Mode for
operation in an SIS 2-wire system select Configure /
Setup, Basic Setup, and Setup Wizard from the Online
menu.
The Setup Wizard will automatically setup the
instrument for a 2-wire installation based upon the
printed wiring board DIP switch setting.
May 2007
Note
To ensure correct installation, follow
the Basic Setup procedures as
described in Section 4.
2-23
DVC6000 SIS
AUX − (UNUSED)
AUX +
SHIELD TO
GROUNDING LUG
LOOP +
LOOP −
TO AUX +
ON DVC6000 SIS
2
LOOP +
FROM LOGIC SOLVER
TO LOOP +
ON DVC6000 SIS
DVC6000 SIS
LOOP −
FROM LOGIC SOLVER
TO LOOP −
ON DVC6000 SIS
8−20 mA SIGNAL
FROM LOGIC SOLVER
SHIELDED CABLE
SHIELD NOT
CONNECTED
SHIELD TO
GROUNDING
LUG
LCP100
AUX +
LOOP −
LOOP +
PREFERRED METHOD FOR NEW OR
RETROFIT INSTALLATIONS
NOTE: THE LOGIC SOLVER MINIMUM OUTPUT MUST BE AT LEAST 8 mA. THE LCP100,
WHEN POWERED BY THE LOOP, CONSUMES APPROXIMATELY 4 mA.
E1046
Figure 2-23. Wiring for 8−20 mA Loop-Powered Configuration (Wiring to LCP100, then DVC6000 SIS)
LCP100 (Local Control Panel)
Installation
The LCP100 Local Control Panel has four (4)
mounting holes for on-site mounting of the device. The
LCP100 must be installed so that the wiring
connections are on the bottom to prevent
accumulation of moisture inside the box.
Electrical connections are shown in figures 2-23 and
2-24. There are two different ways to power the
LCP100. The first method uses loop current to power
2-24
the LCP100. However, because the LCP100
consumes energy to drive the lights and
microprocessor, minimum current signal from the logic
solver must be 8 mA. If the logic solver can not
provide an output range of 8−20 mA, then the external
power method must be used. The second method
requires an external 24 VDC source to power the
LCP100. Ensure that the DIP switch position is
properly set for the desired mode of operation (loop
powered or 24 VDC powered).
When installing the cover, apply no more than
20 inlbf to prevent the metal inserts from pulling out.
May 2007
Installation
AUX +
LOOP +
LOOP −
AUX −
SHIELD TO
GROUNDING LUG
TO AUX +
ON DVC6000 SIS
2
24VDC +
24VDC −
TO AUX −
ON DVC6000 SIS
DVC6000 SIS
4−20 mA SIGNAL
FROM LOGIC SOLVER
SHIELDED CABLE
SHIELD TO
GROUNDING
LUG
AUX +
AUX −
LCP100
LOOP −
LOOP +
24VDC
SHIELD NOT
CONNECTED
SIMPLE METHOD FOR INSTALLING AN LCP100 TO
AN EXISTING DVC6000 SIS INSTRUMENT WHEN
24 VDC POWER IS AVAILABLE
NOTE: DO NOT CONNECT THE LOOP + TERMINAL IN THE LCP100 TO THE LOOP + TERMINAL
IN THE DVC6000 SIS. THIS WILL CAUSE THE LCP100 TO UNNECESSARILY CONSUME 4 mA.
E1047
Figure 2-24. Wiring for 24 VDC External Power Configuration
May 2007
2-25
DVC6000 SIS
2
2-26
May 2007
375 Field Communicator Basics
3-3
Section 3 Model 375 Field Communicator
Basics
May 2007
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Using the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
On/Off Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Navigation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Tab Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Alphanumeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Backlight Adjustment Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Multifunction LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Using the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Using the Soft Input Panel Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Offline Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Setup and Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing Instrument Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-5
Online Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Displaying the Field Communicator
Device Description Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
3
3-1
DVC6000 SIS
BLINKING HEART
INDICATES
COMMUNICATION
WITH A FIELDVUE
INSTRUMENT
Display
HOT
KEY
HART AND fieldbus
COMMUNICATION
TERMINALS (TOP)
SCRATCH
PAD
IrDA INTERFACE
(TOP)
TOUCH SCREEN
DISPLAY
3
STYLUS
(BACK)
DVC6000: Tag
1 Setup & Diag
2 Analog In
3 Travel
4 Valve SP
The Field Communicator communicates information to
you through a 1/4 VGA (240 by 320 pixels)
monochrome touch screen. It has a viewing area of
approximately 9 cm by 12 cm.
OPTIONAL
EXPANSION
PORT (SIDE)
20mA
100%
100%
Using the Keypad
ENTER KEY
On/Off Key
NAVIGATION KEYS
(FOUR ARROW KEYS)
FUNCTION KEY
TAB KEY
ALPHANUMERIC
KEYS
POWER SUPPLY
CHARGER
CONNECTION (SIDE)
ON/OFF KEY
BACKLIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
KEY
MULTIFUNCTION LED
Figure 3-1. Model 375 Field Communicator
The on/off key is used to turn the Field Communicator
on and off.
From the Main Menu, select HART Application to run
the HART application. On startup, the HART
Application automatically polls for devices.
If a HART-compatible device is found, the Field
Communicator displays the Online menu. For more
information on Online and Offline operation, see Menu
Structure in this section.
The on/off key is disabled while any applications are
open, making it necessary for you to exit the 375 Main
Menu before using the on/off key. This feature helps to
avoid situations where the Field Communicator could
be unintentionally turned off while a device’s output is
fixed or when configuration data has not been sent to
a device.
Navigation Keys
Note
The Model 375 Field Communicator
device description revision (DD)
determines how the Field
Communicator interfaces with the
instrument. For information on
displaying the device description
revision, see page 3-5.
This section discusses the display, keypad, and menu
structure for the Field Communicator, shown in figure
3-1. It includes information for displaying the Field
Communicator device description revision number. For
information on connecting the Field Communicator to
the instrument, see the Installation section. For more
information on the Field Communicator, such as
specifications and servicing, see the User’s Manual for
the Field Communicator 00375-0047-0001, included
with the Field Communicator. This manual also is
available from Rosemount Inc., Measurement Division.
3-2
Four arrow navigation keys allow you to move through
the menu structure of the application. Press the right
arrow ( ) navigation key to navigate further into the
menu.
Enter Key
The enter key allows you perform the highlighted item,
or to complete an editing action. For example, if you
highlight the Cancel button, and then push the enter
key, you will cancel out of that particular window. The
enter key does not navigate you through the menu
structure.
Tab Key
The tab key allows you to move between selectable
controls.
Alphanumeric Keys
Figure 3-2 shows the alphanumeric keypad. Data
entry, and other options, using letters, number and
May 2007
375 Field Communicator Basics
ABC
Copy
2
DEF
Paste
Hot Key
GHI
JKL
MNO
Insert
+ Hot Key
TUV
WXYZ
#%&
1
4
PQRS
7
5
8
3
6
9
, ( ) ‘
J
0
−
Multifunction LED
The multifunction LED indicates when the 375 Field
Communicator is in various states. Green signifies that
the Field Communicator is on, while flashing green
indicates that it is in power saving mode. Green and
orange indicate that the function key is enabled, and a
green and orange flash indicates that the on/off button
has been pressed long enough for the Field
Communicator to power up.
/
3
Using the Touch Screen
Figure 3-2. Model 375 Field Communicator Alphanumeric and
Shift Keys
other characters can be performed using this keypad.
The 375 Field Communicator will automatically
determine the mode depending upon the input
necessary for the particular field.
To enter text when in alphanumeric mode, press the
desired keypad button in quick repetition to scroll
through the options to attain the appropriate letter or
number.
For example, to enter the letter “Z”, press the 9 key
quickly four times.
The alphameric keys are also used for the Fast Key
sequence. The Fast Key sequence is a sequence of
numerical button presses, corresponding to the menu
options that lead you to a given task. See the Model
375 Field Communicator Menu Structures at the
beginning of this manual.
The touch screen display allows you to select and
enter text by touching the window.
Tap the window once to select a menu item or to
activate a control. Double-tap to access the various
options associated with the menu item.
CAUTION
The touch screen should be contacted
by blunt items only. The preferred item
is the stylus that is included with the
375 Field Communicator. The use of a
sharp instrument can cause damage to
the touch screen interface.
Use the back arrow button( ) to return to the
previous menu. Use the terminate key ( ) in the
upper right corner of the touch screen to end the
application.
Backlight Adjustment Key
The backlight adjustment key has four settings
allowing you to adjust the intensity of the display.
Higher intensities will shorten the battery life.
Function Key
The function key allows you to enable the alternate
functionality of select keys. The grey characters on the
keys indicate the alternate functionality. When
enabled, the orange multifunction LED light will appear
and an indication button can be found on the soft input
panel (SIP). Press the key again to disable the
function key.
May 2007
Using the Soft Input Panel (SIP)
Keyboard
As you move between menus, different dynamic
buttons appear on the display. For example, in menus
providing access to on-line help, the HELP button
may appear on the display. In menus providing access
to the Home menu, the HOME button may appear on
the display. In many cases the SEND label appears
indicating that you must select the button on the
display to send the information you have entered on
the keypad to the FIELDVUE instrument’s memory.
Online menu options include:
3-3
DVC6000 SIS
Hot Key
Tap the Hot Key from any Online window to display
the Hot Key menu. This menu allows you to quickly:
Change the instrument mode
Change the control mode
Change the instrument protection
3
Change tuning to improve response
The Hot Key can also be accessed by enabling the
function key, and pressing the 3 key on the
alphanumeric key pad.
For details on instrument mode, control mode,
protection, tuning sets, and other configuration
parameters, see the Detailed Setup section of this
manual.
Menu Structure
The Field Communicator is generally used in two
environments: offline (when not connected to an
instrument) and online (connected to an instrument).
Offline Operation
Selecting HART Application when not connected to a
FIELDVUE instrument causes the Field Communicator
to display the message “No device found at address 0.
Poll?” Selecting “Yes” or “No” will bring you to the
HART Application menu. Three choices are available
from this screen: Offline, Online and Utility. The Offline
menu allows you to create offline configurations, as
well as view and change device configurations stored
on the 375 Field Communicator. The Utility menu
allows you to set the polling option, change the
number of ignored status messages, view the
available Device Descriptions, perform a simulation,
and view HART diagnostics.
Saving Setup and Calibration Data
is a text editor that allows
SCRATCHPAD
you to create, open, edit and save simple text (.txt)
documents.
HELP—gives you information regarding the
display selection.
SEND—sends the information you have entered
to the instrument.
HOME—takes you back to the Online menu.
EXIT—takes you back to the menu from which
you had requested the value of a variable that can only
be read.
ABORT—cancels your entry and takes you back
to the menu from which you had selected the current
variable or routine. Values are not changed.
OK—takes you to the next menu or instruction
screen.
ENTER—sends the information you have
selected to the instrument or flags the value that is to
be sent to the instrument. If it is flagged to be sent, the
SEND dynamic label appears as a function key
selection.
ESC—cancels your entry and takes you back to
the menu from which you had selected the current
variable or routine. Values are not changed.
SAVE—saves information to the internal flash or
the configuration expansion module.
3-4
You can upload setup and calibration data from the
DVC6000 Series digital valve controller and save it in
the Field Communicator Internal Flash or a
Configuration Expansion Module. From the Offline
menu you can then download this data to multiple
devices so that they all contain the same setup and
calibration data. You can also edit the saved data.
You upload setup and calibration data from the Online
menu. This requires that the Field Communicator be
connected to a digital valve controller powered by a 4
to 20 mA source. To save data from any Online menu
select the SAVE key. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator to save the data to the Internal Flash or
the Configuration EM and name the saved data. Once
the data is saved, the SAVE key disappears until you
change the data in the instrument.
Downloading the saved data requires that you first
mark the configurable variables you wish to download
(the default is all variables unmarked). To do this, from
the Offline menu select Saved Configuration.
Depending on the location of the saved data, select
either Internal Flash Contents or Configuration EM
Contents. Select the name for the saved data. From
the Saved Configuration menu select Edit.
From the Edit menu you can mark all configurable
variables for download, unmark all configurable
variables so none are downloaded, edit each variable
individually, or save your configuration to the internal
flash or the optional configuration expansion module.
The following briefly describes each item on the menu.
For more information, see the User’s Manual for the
375 Field Communicator − 00375-0047-0001.
Mark All—flags all configurable variables to be
sent to a HART-compatible device. Configurable
May 2007
375 Field Communicator Basics
variables are those that appear when you edit
variables in the configuration using the Edit Individually
option.
Unmark All—removes flags from all configurable
variables in the configuration. Unmarked configurable
variables are not sent to a connected
HART-compatible device.
Edit Individually—opens the Edit Individually
menu to permit editing configurable variables in the
saved data. For information on editing configurable
variables, refer to the Field Communicator product
manual.
Save As...—saves your new configuration to the
Internal Flash, or the Configuration EM. For more
information on the Save As option, see the Field
Communicator product manual.
Once the configurable variables are marked for
download, return to the Saved Configuration menu and
select Save. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator to download the saved data to the
instrument.
Polling
When several devices are connected in the same loop,
such as for split ranging, each device must be
assigned a unique polling address. Use the Polling
options to configure the Field Communicator to
automatically search for all or specific connected
devices.
To enter a polling option, select Utility from the HART
Application menu. Select Configure HART Application,
and then select Polling. Tap ENTER to select the
highlighted option.
The Polling options are:
1. Never Poll—connects to a device at address 0,
and if not found will not poll for devices at addresses 1
through 15.
2. Ask Before Polling—connects to a device at
address 0, and if not found asks if you want to poll for
devices at addresses 1 through 15.
3. Always Poll—connects to a device at address 0,
and if not found will automatically poll for devices at
addresses 1 through 15.
4. Digital Poll—automatically polls for devices at
address 0 through 15 and lists devices found by tag.
5. Poll Using Tag—asks for a device HART tag and
then polls for that device.
6. Poll Using Long Tag—allows you to enter the long
tag of the device. (Only supported in HART Universal
revision 6 devices.)
May 2007
To find individual device addresses, use the Digital
Poll option to find each connected device in the loop
and list them by tag.
For more information on setting the polling address,
see the Detailed Setup section.
System Information
To access the Field Communicator system
information, select Settings from the 375 Main Menu.
About 375 includes software information about your
375 Field Communicator.
Licensing can be viewed when you turn on the 375
Field Communicator and in the License settings menu.
The license setting allows you to view the license on
the System Card.
Memory settings consists of System Card, Internal
Flash size, and Ram size, as well as the Expansion
Module if installed. It allows you to view the total
memory storage and available free space.
Reviewing Instrument Device
Descriptions
The Field Communicator memory module contains
device descriptions for specific HART-compatible
devices. These descriptions make up the application
software that the communicator needs to recognize
particular devices.
To review the device descriptions programmed into
your Field Communicator, select Utility from the HART
Application menu, then select Available Device
Descriptions. The manufacturers with device
descriptions installed on the Field Communicator are
listed.
Select the desired manufacturer to see the list of the
currently installed device models, or types, provided by
the selected manufacturer.
Select the desired instrument model or type to see the
available device revisions that support that instrument.
Simulation
The Field Communicator provides a simulation mode
that allows you to simulate an online connection to a
HART-compatible device. The simulation mode is a
training tool that enables you to become familiar with
the various menus associated with a device without
having the Field Communicator connected to the
device.
To simulate an online connection, select Utility from
the main menu. Select Simulation then select Fisher
Controls. Select DVC6000 to see the menu structure
for the DVC6000 Series digital valve controller. Refer
to the appropriate sections of this manual for
information on the various menus.
3-5
3
DVC6000 SIS
Online Operation
The Online menu is the first to be displayed when
connecting to a HART compatible device. It contains
important information about the connected device.
The figures in the beginning of this manual show the
DVC6000 Series digital valve controller menu
structures.
3
Displaying the Field Communicator
Device Description Revision
Device Description (DD) Revision is the revision
number of the Device Description that resides in the
Field Communicator. It defines how the Field
3-6
Communicator is to interact with the user and
instrument.
Field Communicators with device description revision
1 are used with DVC6000 Series instruments with
firmware revision 7. You can display the device
description revision when the Field Communicator is
Offline or Online:
Offline—To see the Field Communicator device
description revision number, from the main menu,
select Utility, Simulation, Fisher Controls, and
DVC6000.
Online—To see the Field Communicator device
description revision number, connect the Field
Communicator to an instrument connected to a source
supplying a 4 to 20 mA signal. From the Online menu,
select Device Variables, DD Information.
May 2007
Basic Setup
4-4
Section 4 Basic Setup
May 2007
Configuration Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Instrument Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Performance Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
4
4-1
DVC6000 SIS
Configuration Protection
To setup and calibrate the instrument, the protection
must be set to None with the Field Communicator. If
the protection is not None, changing the protection
requires placing a jumper across the Auxiliary
terminals in the terminal box.
Note
4
When an LCP100 Control Panel is
used, changing protection does not
require placing the jumper across the
Auxiliary terminals in the terminal box.
To remove protection:
1. Connect a 4 to 20 mA source to the instrument.
2. Connect the Field Communicator to the instrument
and turn it on.
3. Press the Hot key on the Field Communicator and
select Protection.
4. From the Protection menu, select None. When
prompted by the Field Communicator, temporarily
attach the jumper to the AUX + and AUX − terminals
in the instrument terminal box.
Instrument Mode
To setup and calibrate the instrument, the instrument
mode must be Out Of Service.
To view/change the instrument mode, press the Hot
Key and select Instrument Mode. If the mode is not
Out Of Service, select Out Of Service from the
Instrument Mode menu and press ENTER.
Instrument Mode allows you to either take the
instrument Out of Service or place it In Service.
Taking the instrument Out of Service allows you to
perform instrument calibration and also allows you to
change setup variables that affect control. See Setting
Protection to ensure protection is set correctly prior to
operation.
4-2
Basic Setup
WARNING
Changes to the instrument setup may
cause changes in the output pressure
or valve travel. Depending on the
application, these changes may upset
process control, which could result in
personal injury or property damage.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or equipment
damage caused by the release of
process pressure, always use the
Setup Wizard to perform setup and
calibration before placing the
DVC6000 Series instrument in
operation as an SIS solution for the
first time. The Setup Wizard sets up
the required parameters for SIS
solutions.
Note
To setup and calibrate the instrument,
the protection must be None and the
Instrument Mode must be Out Of
Service. See Configuration Protection
and Instrument Mode at the beginning
of this section for information on
removing instrument protection and
changing the instrument mode.
When the DVC6000 Series digital valve controller is
ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller and sets up
the instrument as specified on the order. When
mounting to a valve in the field, the instrument needs
to be setup to match the instrument to the valve and
actuator.
Before beginning Basic Setup, be sure the instrument
is correctly mounted as described in the Installation
section.
May 2007
Basic Setup
Setup Wizard (1-1-1)
Note
The Setup Wizard must be run for first
time installations before placing the
DVC6000 in service.
Use the Setup Wizard in the Model 375 Field
Communicator to setup the digital valve controller for
operation in an SIS solution. The Setup Wizard
automatically sets up the instrument using specified
actuator information. To access the Setup Wizard,
from the Online Menu select Configure/Setup, Basic
Setup, and Setup Wizard.
1. When prompted by the Setup Wizard, enter the
pressure units (psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2).
WARNING
If you answer YES to the prompt for
permission to move the valve when
the Field Communicator is
determining the travel sensor motion,
the instrument will move the valve
through its full travel range. To avoid
personal injury and property damage
caused by the release of pressure or
process fluid, provide some
temporary means of control for the
process.
4
10. Indicate if a volume booster or quick release is
present.
2. Enter the maximum instrument supply pressure.
After entering the maximum instrument supply
pressure, the Setup Wizard prompts you for actuator
information.
3. Enter the partial stroke test start point.
4. Indicate if the DVC6000 is connected to an
LCP100.
5. Enter the manufacturer of the actuator on which
the instrument is mounted. If the actuator
manufacturer is not listed, select Other.
6. Enter the actuator model or type. If the actuator
model is not listed, select Other.
7. Enter the actuator size.
8. Enter the Relay Type.
9. Select whether the valve is open or closed under
the zero power condition, if prompted.
Note
When completing steps 3 through 9,
refer to table 4-1 for possible
configurations for a digital valve
controller operated by a 4−20 mA input
current (point-to-point mode), and
table 4-2 for possible configurations
for a digital valve controller operated
by a 0−24 VDC power supply
(multidrop mode).
May 2007
Note
The use of a Quick Exhaust Valve
(QEV) is not recommended for safety
instrumented system applications. The
use of a QEV in an SIS application may
cause the valve to cycle.
11. Specify if factory defaults should be used for basic
setup. If you select YES for factory default, the Field
Communicator sets the setup parameters to the
values listed in table 4-3. If you select NO for the
factory defaults, the setup parameters listed in the
table remain at their previous settings.
Typically the Setup Wizard determines the required
setup information based upon the actuator
manufacturer and model specified. However, if you
enter other for the actuator manufacturer or the
actuator model, then you will be prompted for setup
parameters such as:
Actuator Style (select spring & diaphragm, piston
single-acting with spring, piston double-acting with
spring)
Valve Style (select the valve style, rotary or sliding
stem)
On Loss of Instrument Signal, (valve opens or
closes). See Zero Power Condition in the Detailed
Setup section.
Feedback Connection (select Rot-All, SS-roller, or
SStem-Standard). See Feedback Connection in the
Detailed Setup section.
4-3
DVC6000 SIS
Table 4-1. Possible Configurations for a Digital Valve Controller operated by 4−20 mA
Setup Wizard Configuration
Relay Type
Partial Stroke
Start Point
Operating Conditions
Zero Power
Condition
Input Current
Travel
100%
100%
100%
100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
100%
100%
100%
100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Common Application
Close
20 mA
Open
Open
Less Common Application
Open
4 mA
A or C
Open
Less Common Application
Close
4 mA
Close
Close
Common Application
Open
20 mA
Close
Less Common Application
Close
4
Actual Valve Travel
Status Monitoring
Travel Set
Point
20 mA
Open
Open
Common Application
Open
4 mA
B
Open
Common Application
Close
4 mA
Close
Close
Less Common Application
Open
20 mA
Close
Table 4-2. Possible Configurations for a Digital Valve Controller operated by 0−24 VDC
Setup Wizard Configuration
Relay Type
Partial Stroke
Start Point
Operating Conditions
Zero Power
Condition
Power Supply
Close
Open
Open
A or C
Close
Close
Open
Close
Open
Open
B
Close
Close
Open
Partial Stroke Start Point (select the start point for
the Partial Stroke Test; either Valve Open or Valve
Close).
LCP100 Local Control Panel (indicate if the
instrument is connected to an LCP100 local control
panel).
Travel Sensor Motion (increasing air pressure
causes the travel sensor shaft to rotate clockwise or
counterclockwise), The Setup Wizard will ask if it can
move the valve to determine travel sensor motion.
4-4
Actual Valve Travel
Status Monitoring
Travel Set
Point
Travel
100%
100%
100%
100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
100%
100%
100%
100%
0%
0%
0%
0%
Common Application
24 VDC
Open
Less Common Application
24 VDC
Open
Less Common Application
24 VDC
Close
Common Application
24 VDC
Close
Less Common Application
24 VDC
Open
Common Application
24 VDC
Open
Common Application
24 VDC
Close
Less Common Application
24 VDC
Close
If you answer yes, the instrument may stroke the valve
the full travel span to determine travel sensor rotation.
If you answer No, then you will have to specify the
rotation for increasing air pressure (determine the
rotation by viewing the end of the travel sensor shaft).
See Travel Sensor Motion in the Detailed Setup
section.
Tuning Set (see Tuning Set in the Detailed Setup
section).
May 2007
Basic Setup
After choosing the appropriate tuning set, a message
appears on the display, asking if you would like to
download factory defaults for Setup. Yes is
recommended for Initial Setup. Refer to table 4-3 for
factory download defaults.
Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator
display. The calibration procedure uses the valve and
actuator stops as the 0% and 100% calibration points.
For additional information, refer to Auto Calibrate
Travel in the Calibration section.
Table 4-3. DVC6000 Series Factory Download Default Settings
Setup Parameter
Analog Input Units(1)
Analog In Range High(1)
Analog In Range Low(1)
Control Mode
Restart Control Mode
Default Setting
mA
20.0 mA
4.0 mA
Analog(1)
Digital(2)
Analog(1)
Digital(2)
Lag Time
Input Characteristic
Travel Limit High
Travel Limit Low
0 secs
Linear
125%
−25%
Once Auto Calibration is complete, you will be asked
to enter the desired stroke test speed (default is
0.25%/sec). An additional automatic PST calibration is
run to determine the default value or the partial stroke
pressure limit for single acting actuators (this will be
differential pressure for double acting) and pressure
set point for End Point Pressure Control.
Travel Cutoff High
Travel Cutoff Low
Travel Deviation Alert Point
Travel Deviation Time
Set Point Rate Open
Set Point Rate Close
Polling Address
50%
50%
5.0%
10.0 seconds
0%/sec
0%/sec
0
Pressure Deviation Alert Pt
Pressure Deviation Alert Time
5.0 psi(3)
30.0 seconds
When calibration is complete, you are asked if you
wish to adjust the relay (double-acting only). Select
yes to adjust the relay. For additional information, refer
to Relay Adjustment in the Calibration section.
Command #3 (Trending) Pressure
For double-acting actuators
For single-acting actuators
differential output pressure
actuator pressure
Valve Set Point(2)
Restart Travel Set Point(2)
Self-Test Shutdown(2)
Note
Relay Adjustment is only available for
the double-acting relay (Relay A).
After instrument setup is completed, and you have
placed the instrument in service, if End Point Pressure
Control not enabled, you will be prompted to enable it.
Select yes. Refer to Partial Stroke Variables in the
Detailed Setup section for more information.
If after completing auto setup and auto calibration the
valve seems slightly unstable or unresponsive, you
can improve operation by selecting Performance
Tuner from the Basic Setup menu. For additional
information on using the Performance Tuner to
optimize digital valve controller tuning, refer to the
Performance Tuner information below.
May 2007
4
100% if ZPC = Open
0% if ZPC = Closed
100% if ZPC = Open
0% if ZPC = Closed
All Failures Disabled
1. Analog mode only − DIP switch set to Multi.
2. Digital mode only. − DIP switch set to Pt-Pt
3. Adjust to bar, kPa, or kg/cm2 if necessary.
Performance Tuner (1-1-2)
The Performance Tuner is used to optimize digital
valve controller tuning. It can be used with digital valve
controllers mounted on most sliding-stem and rotary
actuators, including Fisher and other manufacturers’
products. Moreover, because the Performance Tuner
can detect internal instabilities before they become
apparent in the travel response, it can generally
optimize tuning more effectively than manual tuning.
Typically, the Performance Tuner takes 3 to 5 minutes
to tune an instrument, although tuning instruments
mounted on larger actuators may take longer.
Access the Performance Tuner by selecting
Performance Tuner from the Basic Setup menu.
Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display
to optimize digital valve controller tuning.
4-5
DVC6000 SIS
4
4-6
May 2007
Detailed Setup
5-5
Section 5 Detailed Setup
Menu and Quick Key Sequence Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Cover
May 2007
Detailed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
Mode and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Mode
Control Mode
Restart Control Mode
Burst Mode
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection
5-4
5-4
Response Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel Tuning Set
Travel Tuning Set
Travel Proportional Gain
Travel Velocity Gain
Travel MLFB Gain
Travel Integral Control Enable
Travel Integral Gain
Stabilize/Optimize
Integral Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integral Dead Zone
Integral Limit
Pressure Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Tuning Set
Pressure Tuning Set
Pressure Proportional Gain
Pressure MLFB Gain
Pressure Integral Control Enable
Pressure Integral Gain
Travel/Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel/Pressure Cutoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel/Pressure Cutoff Hi
Travel/Pressure Cutoff Lo
End Point Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End Point Control Enable
PST Start Point
Pressure Set Point
Pressure Sat Time
5-6
5-6
5-6
5
5-6
5-7
5-10
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-1
DVC6000 SIS
5
5-2
Input Characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Custom Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Rate Open
SP Rate Close
Lag Time
5-13
5-14
5-14
Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Current Shutdown
Drive Signal Alert
Drive Signal Alert Enable
Drive Signal
Processor Impaired Alerts
Offline/Failed Alert Enable
Power Starvation Alert Enable
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable
Critical NVM Shutdown
Flash ROM Shutdown
No Free Time Shutdown
Reference Voltage Shutdown
Sensor Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel Sensor Shutdown
Temperature Sensor Shutdown
Pressure Sensor Shutdown
Environmental Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aux Terminal Alert
Auxiliary Terminal Alert Enable
Auxiliary Input
Auxiliary Terminal Mode
Supply Pressure Lo Alert
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable
Supply Pressure
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Point
Travel Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Travel
Travel Set Point
Travel Alert Dead Band
Travel Deviation Alert
Travel Limit Alerts
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts
Travel Cutoff Alerts
Travel History Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cycle Count
Cycle Count/Travel Accumulator Deadband
Travel Accumulator
SIS Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PST Pressure Limit
Pressure Deviation Alert Enable
Pressure Deviation Alert Point
Pressure Deviation Time
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Alert Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alrt Record Not Empty Enab
Alrt Record Full Enab
Display Record
Clear Record
Alert Groups
5-18
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19
Instrument Time
Calibration and Diagnostics
Operational
Integrator
May 2007
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General
Units
Analog Input Range
Relay Type
Zero Power Condition
Maximum Supply Pressure
Auxiliary Terminal Mode
Instrument Date and Time
Calibration Status and Location
5-19
Valve & Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manufacturer
Valve Serial Number
Valve Style
Actuator Style
Feedback Connection
Travel Sensor Motion
5-21
Partial Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PST Enable
PST Variables View/Edit
Auto Test Interval
DVC Power Up
5-22
5
5-3
DVC6000 SIS
Table 5-1. Factory Default Detailed Setup Parameters
Setup Parameter
Detailed Setup
Control Mode
The Detailed Setup selection from the Configure/Setup
menu allows you to configure the digital valve
controller to your application. Table 5-1 lists the default
settings for a standard factory configuration. You can
adjust actuator response, set the various modes,
alerts, ranges, travel cutoffs and limits. You can also
restart the instrument and set the protection.
Mode and Protection (1-2-1)
5
Valve Closed(2)
Analog In Range Low
4 mA
Analog In Range High
20 mA
Travel Sensor Motion
Auxiliary Terminal Mode
Instrument Mode allows you to either take the
instrument Out Of Service or place it In Service.
Taking the instrument Out Of Service allows you to
perform instrument calibration and also allows you to
change setup variables that affect control, provided
the calibration/configuration protection is properly set.
See Setting Protection.
50(2)
PSI
Burst Mode Enable
Burst Command
Cmd #3 (Trending) Pressure
For double-acting actuators
Note
For single-acting actuators
Tuning Set
Dynamic
Response and
Tuning
Travel History
Alerts
Some changes that require the
instrument to be taken Out Of Service
will not take effect until the instrument
is placed back In Service or the
instrument is restarted.
Control Mode lets you define where the instrument
reads its set point. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to choose one of the following
control modes: Analog or Digital.
Choose Analog control mode if the instrument is to
receive its set point over the 4–20 mA loop. Normally
the instrument control mode is Analog.
differential output
pressure
actuator pressure
F(2)
125%
Travel Limit Low
−25%
Travel/Pressure Cutoff High
50%
Travel/Pressure Cutoff Low
50%
Set Point Rate Open
0%/sec
Set Point Rate Close
0%/sec
Set Point Filter Lag Time
0 sec
Partial Stroke Start Point
Valve Open(2)
Cycle Count Alert Enable
No
Cycle Count Alert Deadband
1%
Cycle Count Alert Point
1,000,000
Travel Accumulator Alert
Enable
No
Travel Accumulator Deadband
1%
Travel Accumulator Alert Point
1000000%
Travel Deviation Alert Enable
Yes
5%
10 sec
Pressure Deviation Alert
Enable
Yes
Pressure Deviation Alert Point
2 psi
Pressure Deviation Alert Time
30 sec
Supply Pressure Alert Enable
Supply Pressure Alert Point
Travel Alert Lo Enable
Lo Point
Travel Alert Hi Enable
Hi Point
Travel Alerts
3
Travel Limit High
Drive Signal Alert Enable
You can change the control mode by selecting Control
Mode from the Mode and Protection menu, or press
the Hot Key and select Control Mode.
0
No
Linear
Travel Deviation Time
Control Mode
F
Input Characteristic
Travel Deviation Alert Point
Deviation &
Other Alerts
Clockwise(2)
Push Button Partial
Stroke Test
Pressure Units
Polling Address
You can change the instrument mode by selecting
Mode and Protection, Instrument Mode from the
Detailed Setup menu, or press the Hot Key and select
Instrument Mode.
mA
Rotary − All(2)
Max Supply Pressure
Temperature Units
Instrument Mode
5-4
Resume Last
Zero Power Condition
Feedback Connection
Mode
Analog / Digital(2)
Restart Control Mode
Analog Input Units
Instrument
Configuration
Default Setting(1)
Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable
Lo Lo Point
Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable
Yes
Yes
19 psi
No
−25%
No
125%
No
−25%(3)
No
Hi Hi Point
125%(4)
Deadband
5%
−continued on next page−
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Table 5-1. Factory Default Detailed Setup Parameters
(continued)
Setup Parameter
Electronic Alerts
Informational
Status
Alert Record
Default
Setting(1)
Shutdown Activated
Yes
Power Starvation Alert Enable
No
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable
No
Instrument Time Invalid Enable
Yes
Calibration in Progress Enable
No
Autocalibration in Progress
Enable
No
Diagnostics in Progress Enable
No
Diagnostics Data Available
Enable
Yes
Integrator Saturated Hi Enable
Yes
Integrator Saturated Lo Enable
Yes
Pressure Control Active Enable
Yes
Multi-Drop Alert Enable
No
Valve Alerts Enable
Yes
Failure Alerts Enable
Yes
Misc Alerts Enable
No
Alert Record Not Empty Enable
Yes
Alert Record Full Enable
Yes
1. The settings listed are for standard factory configuration. DVC6000 Series
instruments can also be ordered with custom configuration settings. For the default
custom settings, refer to the order requisition.
2. If the instrument is shipped mounted on an actuator, these values depend upon
the actuator on which the instrument is mounted.
3. Lo Lo point is 1% when used with LCP100.
4. Hi Hi point is 99% when used with LCP100.
Choose Digital control mode if the instrument is to
receive its set point digitally by a 0−24 VDC control
signal, via the HART communications link.
A third mode, Test, is also displayed. Normally the
instrument should not be in the Test mode. The Field
Communicator automatically switches to this mode
whenever it needs to stroke the valve during
calibration or stroke valve, for example. However, if
you abort from a procedure where the instrument is in
the Test mode, it may remain in this mode. To take
the instrument out of the Test mode, select Control
Mode then select either Analog or Digital.
Restart Ctrl Mode
Restart Control Mode lets you choose which operating
mode you want the instrument to be in after a restart.
Access Restart Control mode by selecting Restart Ctrl
Mode from the Mode and Protection menu. Follow the
prompts on the Field Communicator display to define
the restart control mode as Resume Last, Analog, or
Digital.
Burst Mode
Enabling burst mode provides continuous
communication from the digital valve controller. Burst
mode applies only to the transmission of burst mode
data (analog input, travel target, pressure, and travel)
and does not affect the way other data is accessed.
Access to information in the instrument is normally
obtained through the poll/response of HART
May 2007
communication. The Model 375 Field Communicator
or the control system may request any of the
information that is normally available, even while the
instrument is in burst mode. Between each burst mode
transmission sent by the instrument, a short pause
allows the Field Communicator or control system to
initiate a request. The instrument receives the request,
processes the response message, and then continues
“bursting” the burst mode data.
Note
5
Do not use burst mode while using
the HART Loop Interface Monitor
(HIM) from Moore Industries with
DVC6000 instrument level SIS.
To enable burst mode, select Burst Mode, and Burst
Enable from the Mode and Protection menu.
Burst Enable—Yes or no. Burst mode must
be enabled before you can change the burst mode
command.
Burst Command—There are four burst mode
commands. Command 3 is recommended for use
with the Rosemount Model 333 HART Tri-Loop
HART-to-analog signal converter. The other three
are not used at this time.
Cmd 3(Trending)Press—Command 3
provides the following variables:
Primary variable—analog input in % or ma,
Secondary variable—travel target in % of ranged
travel,
Tertiary variable—supply or output pressure in psig,
bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Select Select Cmd 3 Press from
the Burst menu to select if the output A, output B,
differential (A−B), or supply pressure is sent.
Quaternary variable—travel in % of ranged travel.
5-5
DVC6000 SIS
Table 5-2. Gain Values for Preselected Travel Tuning Sets
Protection
Tuning
Set
Protection
When the digital valve controller is in SIS mode, and
protection is on, the instrument cannot be taken Out of
Service. Protection must be turned off to change the
instrument mode.
To change an instrument’s protection, press the Hot
key on the Field Communicator and select Protection
or select Protection from the Detailed Setup menu.
Two levels of protection are available:
None—Neither setup nor calibration is protected.
Allows changing calibration and setup parameters.
5
Config & Calib—Both setup and calibration are
protected. Prohibits changing calibration and protected
setup parameters.
Table 5-3 lists configurable parameters in the
instrument and the requirements for modifying these
parameters, in terms of instrument mode and
protection.
To change an instrument’s protection, press the Hot
key on the Field Communicator and select Protection
or from the Online menu, select Configure/Setup,
Detailed Setup, Mode and Protection, and Protection.
Select the desired level of protection. Follow the
prompts on the Field Communicator display to set the
protection level.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
X
(Expert)
Velocity Gain
Minor Loop
Feedback Gain
2.0
4.4
4.8
5.5
6.2
7.2
8.4
9.7
11.3
13.1
15.5
18.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.1
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.0
6.0
6.0
35
35
35
35
35
34
31
27
23
18
12
12
User Adjusted
User Adjusted
User Adjusted
Proportional Gain
Tvl Tuning Set (1-2-2-1-1-1)
Tvl Tuning Set— There are twelve tuning sets to
choose from. Each tuning set provides a
preselected value for the digital valve controller
gain settings. Tuning set B provides the slowest
response and M provides the fastest response.
Table 5-2 lists the proportional gain, velocity gain
and minor loop feedback gain values for
preselected tuning sets.
In addition, you can select User Adjusted or Expert,
which allows you to modify tuning of the digital
valve controller. With User Adjusted, you specify
the proportional gain; an algorithm in the Field
Communicator calculates the velocity gain and
minor loop feedback gain. With Expert you can
specify the proportional gain, velocity gain, and
minor loop feedback gain.
Response Control (1-2-2)
Select Configure/Setup, Detailed Setup, and
Response Control. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to configure the following
response control parameters: Tuning, Tvl/Press
Control (Travel/Pressure Control), Input Char (Input
Characteristic) Define Custom Char (Define Custom
Characteristic), and Dynamic Response.
Tuning
Travel Tuning (1-2-2-1-1)
WARNING
Changes to the tuning set may cause
the valve/actuator assembly to stroke.
To avoid personal injury and property
damage caused by moving parts,
keep hands, tools, and other objects
away from the valve/actuator
assembly.
5-6
Note
Use Expert tuning only if standard
tuning has not achieved the desired
results.
Stabilize/Optimize or Performance
Tuner may be used to achieve the
desired results more rapidly than
Expert tuning.
Table 5-4 provides tuning set selection guidelines
for Fisher actuators. These tuning sets are only
recommended starting points. After you finish
setting up and calibrating the instrument, you may
have to select either a higher or lower tuning set to
get the desired response. You can use the
Performance Tuner to optimize tuning.
For an actuator not listed in the tables, you can
estimate a starting tuning set by calculating the
casing or cylinder volume. Then, in the tables, find
May 2007
Detailed Setup
an actuator with the closest equivalent volume and
use the tuning set suggested for that actuator.
valve more responsive. This selects the next higher
tuning set (e.g., F to G).
Tvl Prop Gain—Travel Proportional Gain is the
proportional gain for the travel control tuning set.
Changing this parameter will also change the
tuning set to Expert.
If after selecting Decrease Response or Increase
Response the valve travel overshoot is excessive,
select Decrease Damping to select a damping
value that allows more overshoot. Select Increase
Damping to select a damping value that will
decrease the overshoot. When finished, select
done.
Tvl Velocity Gain—Travel Velocity Gain is the
velocity gain for the travel control tuning set.
Changing this parameter will also change the
tuning set to Expert.
Tvl MLFB Gain—Travel MLFB Gain is the minor
loop feedback gain for the travel control tuning set.
Changing this parameter will also change the
tuning set to Expert.
Tvl Integ Enable—Yes or No. Enable the
integral setting to improve static performance by
correcting for error that exists between the travel
target and actual travel. Travel Integral Control is
disabled by default.
Tvl Integ Gain—Travel Integral Gain is the
ratio of the change in output to the change in input,
based on the control action in which the output is
proportional to the time integral of the input.
Stabilize/Optimize —Stabilize/Optimize
permits you to adjust valve response by changing
the digital valve controller tuning.
If the valve is unstable, select Decrease Response
to stabilize valve operation. This selects the next
lower tuning set (e.g., F to E). If the valve response
is sluggish, select Increase Response to make the
May 2007
Performance Tuner
The Performance Tuner is used to optimize digital
valve controller tuning. It can be used with digital valve
controllers mounted on most sliding-stem and rotary
actuators, including Fisher and other manufacturers’
products. Moreover, because the Performance Tuner
can detect internal instabilities before they become
apparent in the travel response, it can generally
optimize tuning more effectively than manual tuning.
Typically, the Performance Tuner takes 3 to 5 minutes
to tune an instrument, although tuning instruments
mounted on larger actuators may take longer.
Integral Settings (1-2-2-1-2)
Integ DeadZ—Integral Dead Zone is a
window around the Primary Setpoint in which
integral action is disabled. This feature is used to
eliminate friction induced limit cycles around the
Primary Setpoint when the integrator is active. The
Dead Zone is configurable from 0% to 2%,
corresponding to a symmetric window from 0% to
+/−2% around the Primary Setpoint. Default value
is 0.25%.
Integ Limit—The Integral Limit provides an
upper limit to the integrator output. The high limit is
configurable from 0 to 100% of the I/P drive signal.
5-7
5
DVC6000 SIS
Table 5-3. Conditions for Modifying DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Parameters
In Service
Parameters
Mode and
Protection
5
Response and
Control
Alerts
Out of Service
Protected
Unprotected
Protected
Unprotected
Instrument Mode
Control Mode(1)
Restart Cont. Mode(1)
Burst Mode Enable
Burst Command
Cmd #3 (Trending) Pressure
Protection
------
----
------
----
Travel Tuning Set
Travel Proportional Gain
Travel Velocity Gain
Travel MLFB Gain
Travel Integral Enable
Travel Integral Gain
Stabilize / Optimize
Performance Tuner
-----------------
-----
-----------------
Integral Dead Zone
Integral Limit
-----
-----
Pressure Tuning Set
Pressure Proportional Gain
Pressure MLFB
Pressure Integral Enable
Pressure Integral Gain
-----------
-----------
Travel / Pressure Cutoff Hi
Travel / Pressure Cutoff Lo
-----
-----
-----
End Point Pressure Control Enable
Partial Stroke Start Point
Pressure Set Point
Pressure Saturation Time
---------
----
---------
Input Characteristic
Define Custom Char.
-----
-----
-----
Set Point Rate Open
Set Point Rate Close
Lag Time
-------
------
------
Drive Current Shutdown
Drive Signal Alert
Drive Signal(1)
--
---
--
---
--
---
---
Offline/Failed Alert Enable
Power Starvation Alert Enable
Non-Critical NVM Alert Enable
---------------
---------------
Critical NVM Shutdown
Flash ROM Shutdown
No Free Time Shutdown
Reference Voltage Shutdown
Temp Sensor Shutdown
Travel Sensor Shutdown
Press Sensor Shutdown
---------------
Aux Terminal Alert Enable
Aux Input(1)
Aux Terminal Mode
-----
--
-----
--
Supply Pressure Lo Alert Enable
Supply Pressure(1)
Supply Press Lo Alert Point
--
--
--
--
Travel(1)
Travel Set Point(1)
Travel Alert Deadband
----
----
----
----
Travel Deviation Alert Enable
Travel Deviation Alert Point
Travel Deviation Time
—indicates parameter may be modified for instrument mode and protection shown.
1. Information only.
−Continued−
5-8
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Table 5-3. Conditions for Modifying DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Parameters (Continued)
In Service
Parameters
Alerts
Status
Instrument
Out of Service
Protected
Unprotected
Protected
Unprotected
Travel Alert Hi Hi Enable
Travel Alert Lo Lo Enable
Travel Alert Hi Hi Point
Travel Alert Lo Lo Point
Travel Alert Hi Enable
Travel Alert Lo Enable
Travel Alert Hi Point
Travel Alert Lo Point
Travel Limit / Cutoff Hi Alert Enable
Travel Limit / Cutoff Lo Alert Enable
Travel / Pressure Cutoff Hi
Travel / Pressure Cutoff Lo
-----
-----
-----
Cycle Count Alert Enable
Cycle Count
Cycle Count Alert Point
Cycle Count / Tvl Accum Deadband
Travel Accumulator Alert Enable
Travel Accumulator
Travel Accumulator Alert Point
Partial Stroke Pressure Limit
Pressure Deviation Alert Enable
Pressure Deviation Alert Point
Pressure Deviation Time
Alert Record Not Empty Enable
Alert Record Full Enable
Display Record(1)
Clear Record
--
--
--
--
Failure Group Enable
Valve Group Enable
Misc Group Enable
Instrument Time Invalid Enable
Instrument Time and Date
Calibration in Progress Enable
Autocalibration in Progress Enable
Diagnostics in Progress Enable
Diagnostic Data Available Enable
Pressure Control Active Enable
Multi-Drop Enable
Integrator Saturated Hi Enable
Integrator Saturated Lo Enable
Integrator Limit
Integrator DeadZ
-----
-----
HART Tag
Message
Descriptor
Date
Valve Serial Number
Instrument Serial Number
Polling Address
-------
---
-------
Pressure Units
Temperature Units
Analog Input Units
Analog Input Range High
Analog Input Range Low
--
-------
--
-------
--
-------
5
—indicates parameter may be modified for instrument mode and protection shown.
1. Information only.
−Continued−
May 2007
5-9
DVC6000 SIS
Table 5-3. Conditions for Modifying DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Parameters (Continued)
Parameters
Valve & Actuator
5
SIS / Partial
Stroke
In Service
Out of Service
Protected
Unprotected
Protected
Unprotected
Relay Type
Zero Power Condition
Max Supply Pressure
Aux Terminal Mode
Inst Date and Time
Last Calibration Status(1)
Calibration Location(1)
--------
-----
--------
-----
--------
-----
Manufacturer(1)
Valve Serial Number
Valve Style
Actuator Style
Feedback Connection
Travel Sensor Motion
-------------
--
---------
-------------
------
Partial Stroke Test Enable
Partial Stroke Press Limit
Max Travel Movement
Test Speed
Test Pause Time
Auto Test Interval
DVC Power Up
---------------
----------
---
---------------
—indicates parameter may be modified for instrument mode and protection shown.
1. Information only.
Pressure Tuning (1-2-2-1-3)
WARNING
Changes to the tuning set may cause
the valve/actuator assembly to stroke.
To avoid personal injury and property
damage caused by moving parts,
keep hands, tools, and other objects
away from the valve/actuator
assembly.
Press Tuning Set (1-2-2-1-3-1)
Press Tuning Set—There are twelve Pressure
Tuning Sets to choose from. Each tuning set
provides a preselected value for the digital valve
controller gain settings. Tuning set B provides the
slowest response and M provides the fastest
response.
Tuning set B is appropriate for controlling a
pneumatic positioner. Table 5-6 lists the
5-10
proportional gain, pressure integrator gain and
minor loop feedback gain values for preselected
tuning sets.
In addition, you can specify Expert tuning and
individually set the pressure proportional gain,
pressure integrator gain, and pressure minor loop
feedback gain. Individually setting or changing any
tuning parameter will automatically change the
tuning set to X (expert).
Note
Use Expert tuning only if standard
tuning has not achieved the desired
results.
Stabilize/Optimize and performance
tuner may be used to achieve the
desired results more rapidly than
Expert tuning.
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Table 5-4. Actuator Information for Basic Setup
Actuator
Manufacturer
Actuator
Model
Actuator Size
Actuator Style
585C & 585CR
25
50, 60
60, 80
100, 130
Piston Dbl w/ or
w/o Spring. See
actuator instruction
manual and
nameplate.
657
667
Fisher
1051 & 1052
30
34, 40
45, 50
46, 60, 70, 76, &
80-100
30
34, 40
45, 50
46, 60, 70, 76, &
80-100
20, 30
33
40
60, 70
Spring &
Diaphragm
Spring &
Diaphragm
Spring &
Diaphragm
SStem-Standard
for travels up to
4 inches. SStemRoller for longer
travels
Counterclockwise
M
H
K
L
SStem-Standard
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
Rotary
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
M
H
I
K
M
Rotary
1066
20, 27, 75
Piston Dbl w/o
Spring
Specify
Rotary
1066SR
20
27, 75
G
L
Rotary
Relay A or C
Relay B
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
B
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
C
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
D
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Press Prop Gain—Pressure Proportional Gain is
the proportional gain for the pressure control tuning
set. Changing this parameter will also change the
tuning set to Expert.
Press MLFB Gain—Pressure MLFB Gain is the
minor loop feedback gain for the pressure control
tuning set. Changing this parameter will also
change the tuning set to Expert.
Press Integ Enable—Yes or No. Enable the
pressure integral setting to improve static
performance by correcting for error that exists
between the pressure target and actual pressure.
Pressure Integral Control is disabled by default.
Depends upon pneumatic connections.
See description for Travel Sensor
Motion
Clockwise
1061
Travel Sensor Motion
Relay B
SStem-Standard
J
K
L
M
Piston Sgl w/Spring
Travel Sensor Motion
Relay A or C
H
K
L
Piston Dbl w/o
Spring
A
May 2007
Feedback
Connection
30
40
60
68, 80, 100, 130
Table 5-5. Travel Sensor Motion Selections for Type DVC6030
on Type 1066SR Actuators
Mounting Style
Starting
Tuning
Set
F
J
L
M
Depends upon pneumatic connections.
See description for Travel Sensor
Motion
Depends upon pneumatic connections.
See description for Travel Sensor
Motion
Depends upon mounting style, see
actuator instruction manual and table
5-5
Table 5-6. Gain Values for Preselected Pressure Tuning Sets
Tuning
set
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
X
(Expert)
0.5
2.2
2.4
2.8
3.1
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.6
7.8
9.0
Pressure
Integrator
Gain
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Pressure
Minor Loop
Feedback Gain
35
35
35
35
35
34
31
27
23
18
12
12
User Adjusted
User Adjusted
User Adjusted
Pressure
Proportional Gain
Press Integ Gain—Pressure Integral Gain
(also called reset) is the gain factor applied to the
time integral of the error signal between desired
and actual pressure. Changing this parameter will
also change the tuning set to Expert.
5-11
5
DVC6000 SIS
Tvl/Press Control (1-2-2-2)
Tvl/Press Cutoffs (1-2-2-2-1)
Tvl/Press Cut Hi—Travel Cutoff High defines
the high cutoff point for the travel in percent (%) of
ranged input current.
Tvl/Press Cut Lo—Travel Cutoff Low defines
the low cutoff point for the travel set point.
5
Travel cutoffs are adjustable when the DVC6000
SIS is operating with a 4−20 mA current input. The
Setup Wizard automatically sets travel cutoffs at
50%, making the DVC6000 SIS tier work like an
on-off device. At current levels from 4.0 to 11.99
mA, the DVC6000 SIS will provide minimum output
pressure, and at 12 to 20 mA, the DVC6000 SIS
will provide full output pressure.
You can customize valve response to the control
signal by changing the travel cutoffs. For example,
it is possible to have the valve throttle between 10
and 90% travel, but work as an on-off valve
between 0% to 10% and 90% to 100% travel. The
user now has a standard throttling control valve
between 10% and 90% travel. Outside of this
range, the valve will move to its travel extreme (0%
or 100%).
WARNING
Using the auxiliary terminal (push
button) for partial stroke testing while
the DVC6000 digital valve controller is
in point-to-point mode may cause
changes in output pressure and
travel, resulting in process instability.
Depending on the application, these
changes may upset the process,
which may result in personal injury or
property damage.
If the auxiliary terminal button is
pressed for more than 3 seconds, but
less than 5 seconds, the digital valve
controller will drive the valve from its
existing travel position to 100% travel
condition for a fail close valve (or 0%
travel for a fail open valve) and
perform the partial stroke test. Once
the partial stroke test is completed,
the digital valve controller will bring
the valve back to its original travel,
corresponding to the control set
point.
Note
Note
If you run the Setup Wizard after
adjusting the Travel Cutoffs, they will
revert back to the default values. You
will need to reset the Travel Cutoffs to
the desired settings.
Note
The partial stroke test cannot be
conducted by the Field Communicator
or AMS ValveLink Software while the
digital valve controller is in its normal
travel control mode (with adjustable
cutoffs set to a different value than the
default).
5-12
In a typical 0−24 VDC de-energizeto-trip operating system, a digital valve
controller with the single-acting direct
relay will provide full output pressure
to port A when 24 VDC is applied, and
minimum (near 0) output pressure to
port A when 0 VDC is applied. With the
single-acting direct relay, there would
be no output pressure from port B.
Other configurations of the relay are
available (see table 4-2). An example of
this flexibility is the use of a
single-acting reverse relay that will
supply full pressure output at 0 VDC
input. This configuration can be useful
to provide the benefits of Partial Valve
Stroke Diagnostics but minimize the
spurious trip rate (the power to the
digital valve controller can be lost
without tripping the valve), but would
only be recommended when a
solenoid is provided to take the valve
to the safe position
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Table 5-7. Guidelines for Manually Setting Pressure Set Point
Actuator Type
Relay Type
Zero Power Condition
Closed
A or C
Open
Single Acting
Closed
B
Open
Closed
Double Acting
A
Open
Partial Stroke Start Point
Pressure Set Point
Open
Psupply − 2 psig
Closed
2 psig
Open
2 psig
Closed
Psupply − 2 psig
Open
2 psig
Closed
Psupply − 2 psig
Open
Psupply − 2 psig
Closed
2 psig
Open
Psupply − 5 psig
Closed
5 psig − Psupply
Open
5 psig − Psupply
Closed
Psupply − 5 psig
End Pt Press Control (1-2-2-2-2)
End Pt Control Enab— Yes or No. End Point
Pressure Control allows the digital valve controller
to pull back from saturation of the pneumatic output
after reaching the travel extreme. Rather than
having the instrument provide full supply pressure
(saturation) continuously at the travel extreme, the
digital valve controller switches to an End Point
Pressure Control where the output pressure
(pressure controller set point) to the actuator is
controlled at a certain value. This value is
configured through Pressure Set Point. Because
the digital valve controller is constantly in control
and not allowed to reach a dormant or saturated
state, it is constantly testing its own pneumatic
system. If there is an output pressure deviation, for
example, the instrument will issue an alert. To
assure there is an alert when an output pressure
deviation occurs, set up the alert as described
under Pressure Deviation Alert.
PST Start Pt—Defines the travel stop the
valve needs to be at before a partial stroke test can
be initiated. Also defines the travel stop for end
point pressure control. Setting this value to Not
Configured will disable partial stroke tests and end
point pressure control.
Press Set Point— As part of End Point
Pressure Control, Pressure Set Point is the target
pressure the positioner controls to when the valve
is at the travel stop defined by PST Start Point.
Default values for Pressure Set Point are
summarized in table 5-7. When controlling
pressure in the open position, Pressure Set Point
must be set at a value that ensures the valve will
remain open. When controlling pressure in the
closed position, Pressure Set Point must be set at
a value that ensures the valve will remain closed
and has enough force to maintain its rated shutoff
classification.
May 2007
5
Note
End Point Pressure Control will be set
automatically during the Setup Wizard,
or during the Auto Calibration Travel
procedure.
Refer to table 5-7 for guidelines for manually
setting Pressure Set Point.
Press Sat Time—Pressure Saturation Time is
the amount of time the digital valve controller stays
in hard cutoff before switching to pressure control.
Default is 45 seconds.
Input Char (1-2-2-3)
Input Characterization defines the relationship
between the travel target and ranged set point.
Ranged set point is the input to the characterization
function. If the zero power condition equals closed,
then a set point of 0% corresponds to a ranged input
of 0%. If the zero power condition equals open, a set
point of 0% corresponds to a ranged input of 100%.
Travel target is the output from the characterization
function.
To select an input characterization, select Select Input
Char from the Input Char menu. You can select from
the three fixed input characteristics shown in figure 5-1
or you can select a custom characteristic. Figure 5-1
shows the relationship between the travel target and
ranged set point for the fixed input characteristics,
assuming the Zero Power Condition is configured as
closed.
You can specify 21 points on a custom characteristic
curve. Each point defines a travel target, in % of
ranged travel, for a corresponding set point, in % of
ranged set point. Set point values range from −6.25%
to 106.25%. Before modification, the custom
characteristic is linear.
5-13
DVC6000 SIS
Define Custom Char (1-2-2-4)
125
To define a custom input characteristic, from the Input
Char menu select Define Custom Char. Select the
point you wish to define (1 to 21), then enter the
desired set point value. Press Enter then enter the
desired travel target for the corresponding set point.
When finished, select point 0 to return to the Input
Char menu.
Travel Target, %
100
0
−25
−25
Ranged Set Point, %
100
125
Input Characteristic = Linear
125
Dynamic Response (1-2-2-5)
100
Travel Target, %
SP Rate Open—Maximum rate (% of valve travel
per second) at which the digital valve controller will
move to the open position regardless of the rate of
input current change. A value of 0 will deactivate this
feature and allow the valve to stroke open as fast as
possible.
0
−25
−25
0
Ranged Set Point, %
100
125
Input Characteristic = Equal Percentage
125
SP Rate Close—Maximum rate (% of valve travel
per second) at which the digital valve controller will
move to the close position regardless of the rate of
input current change. A value of 0 will deactivate this
feature and allow the valve to stroke close as fast as
possible.
Lag Time—Slows the response of the digital
valve controller. A value ranging from 0.2 to 10.0 can
be used for noisy or fast processes to improve closed
loop process control. Entering a value of 0.0 will
deactivate the lag filter.
100
Travel Target, %
5
0
With input characterization you can modify the overall
characteristic of the valve and instrument combination.
Selecting an equal percentage, quick opening, or
custom (other than the default of linear) input
characteristic modifies the overall valve and
instrument characteristic. However, if you select the
linear input characteristic, the overall valve and
instrument characteristic is the characteristic of the
valve, which is determined by the valve trim (i.e., the
plug or cage).
Alerts (1-2-3)
0
−25
−25
A6535-1/IL
0
Ranged Set Point, %
100
125
Input Characteristic = Quick Opening
Figure 5-1. Travel Target Versus Ranged Set Point, for Various
Input Characteristics (Zero Power Condition = Closed)
5-14
The following menus are available for configuring
alerts and shutdowns. Items on the menus may be
changed with the instrument In Service. Protection
does not need to be removed (no need to set to
None). Alerts are not processed when a diagnostic is
in progress. Select Configure / Setup, Detailed Setup,
and Alerts. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to configure the following
Alerts: Electronic Alerts, Sensor Alerts, Environment
Alerts, Travel Alerts, Travel History Alerts, SIS Alerts,
and Alert Record.
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Note
The Alerts section covers alerts and
shutdowns. An alert, if enabled, can
provide information on operational
and performance issues. A shutdown,
if enabled, will typically shut the
instrument down if there is a failure
associated with the enabled shutdown.
Electronics Alerts (1-2-3-1)
Drive Current Shutdown— Drive Current
Shutdown describes the status of I/P current;
should the current fail, the digital valve controller
will drive the output to its safe condition. Drive
Current Shutdown is part of “Self Test shutdown”.
Default is not enabled.
Drive Signal Alert (1-2-3-1-2)
Drive Signal Alert checks the drive signal and
calibrated travel. If one of the following conditions
exists for more than 20 seconds, the Drive Signal
Alert is set.
For the case where Zero Power Condition is
defined as closed:
Drive Signal < 10% and Calibrated Travel > 3%
Drive Signal > 90% and Calibrated Travel < 97%
For the case where Zero Power Condition is
defined as open:
Drive Signal < 10% and Calibrated Travel < 97%
Drive Signal > 90% and Calibrated Travel > 3%
Drive Signal Alert Enable—Yes or No. Drive
Signal Alert Enable activates checking of the
relationship between the Drive Signal and the
calibrated travel.
Drive Signal—Shows the value of the
instrument drive signal in % (percent) of maximum
drive.
Processor Impaired Alerts (1-2-3-1-3)
Offline/Failed Alrt Enab—If enabled, set when
the device is in a failed state and not controlling the
input.
Power Starvation Alrt Enab—When enabled,
an alert is generated whenever power starvation is
detected. Default is not enabled.
May 2007
Non-Critical NVM Alrt Enab—When enabled,
an alert is generated whenever there is a failure
associated with non-critical NVM (non-volatile
memory). Default is not enabled.
Critical NVM Shutdown—When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with critical NVM (non-volatile memory).
Default is not enabled.
Flash ROM Shutdown—When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with flash ROM (read only memory).
Default is not enabled.
No Free Time Shutdown—When enabled, the
instrument shuts down whenever there is a failure
associated with No Free Time. Default is not
enabled.
Reference Voltage Shutdown—When
enabled, the instrument shuts down whenever
there is a failure associated with the internal
voltage reference. Default is not enabled.
Sensor Alerts (1-2-5-2)
Tvl Sensor Shutdown
When enabled, the instrument shuts down
whenever there is a failure associated with the
travel sensor. Default is not enabled.
Temp Sensor Shutdown
When enabled, the instrument shuts down
whenever there is a failure associated with the
temperature sensor. Default is not enabled.
Press Sensor Shutdown
When enabled, the instrument shuts down
whenever there is a failure associated with the
pressure sensor. Default is not enabled.
Environment Alerts
Aux Terminal Alrt (1-2-3-3-1)
Aux Terminal Alrt Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled, the aux terminal acts as an alert
activation.
Aux Input—The auxiliary input of the digital
valve controller can be configured to be used in
different ways. The default configuration allows a
pre-configured partial stroke test to be initiated by
shorting the aux terminals together, such as with
the use of an appropriately connected local
pushbutton switch. It can also be configured to
enable an alert that will be generated when a
switch connected to the Aux terminals is either
5-15
5
DVC6000 SIS
“open” or “closed”. The third configuration option is
for the Aux terminals to be used with the LCP100.
In this configuration, the partial stroke test is
initiated using the LCP100, and the Aux Input alert
is not available.
5
Aux Term Mode—Aux terminal mode can be
Disabled, Alert on Open or Close Contact, SIS
Local Control Panel or Push Button Partial Stroke
Test. If the LCP100 is not selected, the default is
Partial Stroke Test. If the LCP100 is selected
during Setup Wizard or enabled in Detailed Setup
as Aux Terminal Mode − SIS Local Control Panel,
the following parameters will be automatically set
under Travel Alerts:
Hi Hi / Lo Lo Enable − YES
Lo Lo Point (%) − 1
Hi Hi Point (%) − 99
DVC Power Up − Manual Reset
Supply Press Lo Alert (1-2-3-3-2)
Supply Press Lo Alrt Enab—When enabled,
the instrument shuts down whenever there is a
failure associated with the supply pressure.
Supply Press—Supply Pressure displays the
instrument supply pressure in psi, bar, kPa, or
kg/cm2.
Supply Press Lo Alrt Pt—Supply Pressure Lo
Alert Point. When the supply pressure falls below
the supply pressure alert point, the supply pressure
alert is active. To disable the supply pressure alert,
set Supply Press Alrt Pt to zero.
Travel Alerts (1-2-3-4)
Tvl Dev Alrt Enab—Travel Deviation Alert
Enable, select Yes or No. When enabled, checks
the difference between the travel target and the
actual travel.
Tvl Dev Alrt Pt—Travel Deviation Alert Point
is the alert point for the difference, expressed in
percent (%), between the travel target and the
actual travel. When the difference exceeds the
alert point for more than the Travel Deviation Time,
the Travel Deviation Alert is set. Default value is
5%.
Tvl Dev Time—Travel Deviation Time is the
time, in seconds, that the travel deviation must
exceed the Travel Deviation Alert Point before the
alert is set. Default value is 10 seconds.
Travel Limit Alerts (1-2-3-4-5)
Travel Alert Hi Hi is set if the ranged travel rises
above the alert high point. Once the alert is set, the
ranged travel must fall below the alert high high
point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert
is cleared. See figure 5-2.
Travel Alert Lo Lo is set if the ranged travel falls
below the alert low low point. Once the alert is set,
the ranged travel must rise above the alert low low
point by the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert
is cleared.
Tvl Alrt Hi Hi Enab—Yes or No. Travel Alert
Hi Hi Enable activates checking of the ranged
travel against the Travel Alert High-High points.
Tvl Alrt Lo Lo Enab—Yes or No. Travel Alert
Lo Lo Enable activates checking of the ranged
travel against the Travel Alert Low-Low points.
Tvl Set Pt—Travel Set Point is the input to the
characterization function.
Tvl Alrt Hi Hi Pt—Travel Alert High-High Point
is the value of the travel, in percent (%) of ranged
travel, which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert
Hi Hi alert. When used with the LCP100 local
control panel this value is defaulted to 99% (< 99%
travel, flashing light, > 99% travel, solid lights).
Tvl Alrt DB—Travel Alert Deadband is the
travel, in percent (%) of ranged travel, required to
clear a travel alert, once it has been set. The
deadband applies to both Travel Alert Hi/Lo and
Travel Alert Hi Hi/Lo Lo. See figure 5-2.
Tvl Alrt Lo Lo Pt—Travel Alert Low-Low Point
is the value of the travel, in percent (%) of ranged
travel, which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert
Lo Lo alert. When used with the LCP100 local
control panel the value is set to 1%.
Travel—Travel displays the actual position of
the valve in percent (%) of calibrated travel.
Travel Deviation Alert (1-2-3-4-4)
If the difference between the travel target and the
actual target exceeds the Travel Deviation Alert
Point for more than the Travel Deviation Time, the
Travel Deviation Alert is set. It remains set until the
difference between the travel target and the actual
travel is less than the Travel Deviation Alert Point
minus the Travel Alert Deadband.
5-16
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts (1-2-3-4-6)
Travel Alert Hi is set if the ranged travel rises
above the alert high point. Once the alert is set, the
ranged travel must fall below the alert high point by
the Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is
cleared. See figure 5-2.
Travel Alert Lo is set if the ranged travel falls below
the alert low point. Once the alert is set, the ranged
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Deadband exceeded, and direction
changed, new Reference Point
established
ALERT IS SET
TRAVEL ALERT
HIGH POINT
TRAVEL ALERT
DEADBAND
ALERT IS CLEARED
A6532/IL
Figure 5-2. Travel Alert Deadband
travel must rise above the alert low point by the
Travel Alert Deadband before the alert is cleared.
Tvl Alrt Hi Enab—Yes or No. Travel Alert Hi
Enable activates checking of the ranged travel
against the Travel Alert High Point.
Tvl Alrt Lo Enab—Yes or No. Travel Alert Lo
Enable activates checking of the ranged travel
against the Travel Alert Lo Point.
Tvl Alrt Hi Point—Travel Alert High Point is
the value of the travel, in percent (%) of ranged
travel, which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert
High alert.
Tvl Alrt Lo Point—Travel Alert Low Point is
the value of the travel, in percent (%) of ranged
travel, which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert
Low alert.
Travel Limit / Cutoff Alerts (1-2-3-4-7)
Tvl Limit/Cutoff Hi Alrt Enab—Yes or No.
Travel Limit /Cutoff Hi Alert Enable activates the
Travel Limit /Cutoff Hi alert.
Tvl Limit/Cutoff Lo Alrt Enab—Yes or No.
Travel Limit /Cutoff Lo Alert Enable activates the
Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo alert.
Tvl/Press Cut Hi—Travel Cutoff Hi defines the
high cutoff point for the travel in percent(%) of
pre-characterized set point.
Deadband Reference
Point
A6533-1/IL
Point at which
cycle is counted.
Deadband (+/− 5%)
Figure 5-3. Cycle Counter Deadband (set at 10%)
difference between the Cycle Counter and the
Cycle Counter Alert point. The Cycle Counter Alert
is set when the value exceeds the Cycle Counter
Alert point. It is cleared after you reset the Cycle
Counter to a value less than the alert point.
Cycle Count—Cycle Counter records the
number of times the travel changes direction. The
change in direction must occur after the deadband
has been exceeded before it can be counted as a
cycle. See figure 5-3. You can reset the Cycle
Counter by configuring it as zero.
Cycle Count Alrt Pt—Cycle Counter Alert
Point is the value of the Cycle Counter, in cycles,
which, when exceeded, sets the Cycle Counter
Alert.
Cycle Count/Tvl Accum Deadband (1-2-3-5-2)
Deadband
Cycle Counter Deadband is the area around the
travel reference point, in percent (%) of ranged
travel, that was established at the last increment of
the Cycle Counter. This area must be exceeded
before a change in travel direction can be counted
as a cycle. See figure 5-3.
Tvl/Press Cut Lo—Travel Cutoff Lo defines
the low cutoff point for the travel in percent (%)of
pre-characterized set point.
Travel Accumulator Deadband is the area around
the travel reference point, in percent (%) of ranged
travel, that was established at the last increment of
the accumulator. This area must be exceeded
before a change in travel can be accumulated. See
figure 5-4.
Travel History Alerts
Tvl Accum (1-2-3-5-3)
Cycle Count (1-2-3-5-1)
Tvl Accum Alrt Enab—Yes or No. Travel
Accumulation Alert Enable activates checking of
the difference between the Travel Accumulator
value and the Travel Accumulator Alert Point. The
Cycle Count Alrt Enab—Yes or No. Cycle
Counter Alert Enable activates checking of the
May 2007
5-17
5
DVC6000 SIS
Pressure Deviation Alert Point for more than the
pressure deviation time, the Pressure Deviation
Alert is set. It remains set until the difference
between the target pressure and the actual
pressure is less than the Pressure Deviation Alert
Point. The pressure deviation alert point and
deviation alert time are configurable and can be
disabled altogether.
Deadband exceeded,
new Reference Point
established
Deadband Reference
Point
Deadband (+/− 5%)
A6534/IL
5
This amount of change is
added to the Travel
Accumulator.
Figure 5-4. Travel Accumulator Deadband (set at 10%)
Travel Accumulation Alert is set when the Travel
Accumulator value exceeds the Travel Accumulator
Alert Point. It is cleared after you reset the Travel
Accumulation to a value less than the alert point.
Tvl Accum—Travel Accumulator records the
total change in travel, in percent (%) of ranged
travel, since the accumulator was last cleared. The
value of the Travel Accumulator increments when
the magnitude of the change exceeds the Travel
Accumulator Deadband. See figure 5-4. You can
reset the Travel Accumulator by configuring it to
zero.
Tvl Accum Alrt Pt—Travel Accumulator Alert
Point is the value of the Travel Accumulator, in
percent (%) of ranged travel, which, when
exceeded, sets the Travel Accumulator Alert.
SIS Alerts (1-2-3-6)
PST Press Limit—Partial Stroke Pressure
Limit defines the output pressure that will cause the
partial stroke test to stop. For actuators that vent
from the test starting point, the pressure limit will
be a minimum value. For actuators that fill from the
test starting point, the pressure will be a maximum
value.
Press Dev Alrt Enab—Pressure Deviation
Alert Enable, select Yes or No. This alert notifies a
monitoring system when a deviation in the actuator
pressure has occurred. This is used when the
instrument is controlling via pressure (Pressure
Control Mode is enabled) to the actuator (rather
than valve position) to prevent saturation of the
pneumatic output. When enabled, this alert checks
the difference between the target pressure and the
actual pressure. If the difference exceeds the
5-18
Press Dev Alrt Pt—Pressure Deviation Alert
Point is the alert point for the difference between
the pressure target and the actual pressure. When
the difference exceeds the alert point for more than
the Pressure Deviation Time, the Pressure
Deviation Alert is set. After completion of the Setup
Wizard or Auto Travel calibration a default value of
2 psi is set. This will generate an alert when the
actuator pressure is not within $2 psi of the target
pressure.
Press Dev Time—Pressure Deviation Time is
the time, in seconds, that the pressure deviation
must exceed the Pressure Deviation Alert Point
before the alert is set. The Pressure Deviation
Time is set to 30 seconds by default.
Alert Record (1-2-3-7)
To be recorded, an alert must both be enabled for
reporting, and the group in which it resides must be
enabled for recording. Table 5-8 lists the alerts
included in each of the groups. When any alert from
an enabled group becomes active, active alerts in all
enabled groups are stored.
Alrt Record Not Empty Enab—Yes or No.
When enabled indicates when an alert has been
recorded.
Alrt Record Full Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when the Alert Event Record is
full.
Display Record—Displays all recorded alerts
and the date and time the alerts were recorded.
Clear Record—Clears the alert record. To
clear the alert record, all alerts in enabled groups
must be inactive.
Alert Groups (1-2-3-7-5)
Failure Group Enab—Permits enabling the
Failure Alert group. Table 5-8 lists the alerts
included in each of the groups.
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Table 5-8. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert Record
Alert Group
Alerts Include in Group
Valve Alerts
Failure Alerts
Miscellaneous Alerts
Travel Lo Alert
Travel Hi Alert
Travel Lo Lo Alert
Travel Hi Hi Alert
Travel Deviation Alert
Drive Signal Alert
Flash ROM Fail
No Free Time
Reference Voltage Fail
Drive Current Fail
Critical NVM Fail
Temperature Sensor Fail
Pressure Sensor Fail
Travel Sensor Fail
Auxiliary input
Valve Group Enab—Permits enabling the
Valve Alert group. Table 5-8 lists the alerts
included in each of the groups.
Misc Group Enab—Permits enabling the
Miscellaneous Alert group. Table 5-8 lists the alerts
included in each of the groups.
Status (1-2-4)
Select Configure / Setup, Detailed Setup, and Status.
Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display
to configure the following parameters: Instrument
Time, Calibration and Diagnostics, Operational, and
Integrator.
Instrument Time (1-2-4-1)
Inst Time Invalid Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when the Instrument Time Invalid
alert is active.
Inst Date and Time—Permits setting the
instrument clock. When alerts are stored in the
alert record, the date and time (obtained from the
instrument clock) that they were stored is also
stored in the record. The instrument clock uses a
24-hour format.
Calibrations & Diagnostics (1-2-4-2)
Cal in Progress Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates that calibration is in progress.
AutoCal in Progress Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates that auto calibration is in
progress.
Diag in Progress Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates that a diagnostic test is in
progress.
May 2007
Diag Data Avail Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when there is diagnostic data
available.
Operational (1-2-4-3)
Press Ctrl Active Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when Pressure Control is active.
Multi-Drop Enab—Yes or No. When enabled
indicates the digital valve controller is operating in a
multi-drop loop.
Integrator (1-2-4-4)
Integrator Sat Hi Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when the Integrator Saturated
High alert is active.
Integrator Sat Lo Enab—Yes or No. When
enabled indicates when the Integrator Saturated Lo
alert is active.
Integ Limit—The Integral Limit provides an
upper limit to the integrator output. The high limit is
configurable from 0 to 100% of the I/P drive signal.
Integ DeadZ—Integral Dead Zone is a window
around the Primary Setpoint in which integral
action is disabled. This feature is used to eliminate
friction induced limit cycles around the Primary
Setpoint when the integrator is active. The Dead
Zone is configurable from 0% to 2%, corresponding
to a symmetric window from 0% to +/−2% around
the Primary Setpoint. Default value is 0.25%.
Instrument (1-2-5)
Select Configure / Setup, Detailed Setup, and
Instrument. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to configure the following
Instrument parameters: General, Units, Analog Input
Range, Relay Type, Zero Pwr Condition (Zero Power
Condition), Max Supply Press (Maximum Supply
Pressure), Aux Term Mode (Auxiliary Terminal Mode)
Inst Date and Time (Instrument Date and Time), and
Calib Status and Loc (Calibration Status and
Location).
General (1-2-5-1)
HART Tag—Enter an up to 8 character HART
tag for the instrument. The HART tag is the easiest
way to distinguish between instruments in a
multi-instrument environment. Use the HART tag to
label instruments electronically according to the
requirements of your application. The tag you
assign is automatically displayed when the Field
Communicator establishes contact with the digital
valve controller at power-up.
5-19
5
DVC6000 SIS
Descriptor—Enter a descriptor for the
application with up to 16 characters. The descriptor
provides a longer user-defined electronic label to
assist with more specific instrument identification
than is available with the HART tag.
Date—Enter a date with the format
MM/DD/YY. Date is a user-defined variable that
provides a place to save the date of the last
revision of configuration or calibration information.
5
Valve Serial Num—Enter the serial number
for the valve in the application with up to 12
characters.
TRAVEL
RANGE
HIGH
ZPC = OPEN
ZPC = CLOSED
CALIBRATED TRAVEL, %
Message—Enter any message with up to 32
characters. Message provides the most specific
user-defined means for identifying individual
instruments in multi-instrument environments.
THE SHAPE OF
THESE LINES DEPENDS ON
THE INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
LINEAR CHARACTERISTIC SHOWN
TRAVEL
RANGE
LOW
INPUT RANGE
LOW
ANALOG INPUT
mA OR % OF 4-20 mA
NOTE:
ZPC = ZERO POWER CONDITION
INPUT RANGE
HIGH
A6531-1 / IL
Inst Serial Num—Enter the serial number on
the instrument nameplate, up to 12 characters.
Polling Address—If the digital valve controller
is used in point-to-point operation, the Polling
Address is 0. When several devices are connected
in the same loop, such as for split ranging, each
device must be assigned a unique polling address.
The Polling Address is set to a value between 0
and 15. To change the polling address the
instrument must be Out Of Service.
For the Field Communicator to be able to
communicate with a device whose polling address
is not 0, it must be configured to automatically
search for all or specific connected devices. For
information on configuring the Field Communicator
for automatic polling, see the Model 375 Field
Communicator Basics section.
Units (1-2-5-2)
Pressure Units—Defines the output and
supply pressure units in either psi, bar, kPa, or
kg/cm2.
Temp Units—Degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius.
The temperature measured is from a sensor
mounted on the digital valve controller’s printed
wiring board.
Analog In Units—Permits defining the Analog
Input Units in mA or percent of 4−20 mA range.
Only for instruments in a 4−20 or 0−20 mA
installation (point-to-point operation).
5-20
Figure 5-5. Calibrated Travel to Analog Input Relationship
Analog Input Range (1-2-5-3)
Input Range Hi—Permits setting the Input
Range High value. Input Range High should
correspond to Travel Range High, if the Zero
Power Condition is configured as closed. If the
Zero Power Condition is configured as open, Input
Range High corresponds to Travel Range Low.
See figure 5-5.
Input Range Lo—Permits setting the Input
Range Low value. Input Range Low should
correspond to Travel Range Low, if the Zero Power
Condition is configured as closed. If the Zero
Power Condition is configured as open, Input
Range Low corresponds to Travel Range High.
See figure 5-5.
Relay Type
There are three basic categories of relays that result in
various combinations from which to select.
Relay Type: The relay type is printed on the label
affixed to the relay body. A = double-acting;
B = single-acting, reverse; C= single-acting, direct.
Special App: This is used only in single-acting
applications where the “unused” output port is
configured to read the pressure downstream of a
solenoid valve. See page 2-14 for additional
information.
Lo Bleed: The label affixed to the relay body
indicates it is a low bleed version (default for SIS tier).
May 2007
Detailed Setup
ACTUATOR
STEM
TRAVEL SENSOR SHAFT
ROLLER
FEEDBACK ARM
STEM
CONNECTOR
CAM
ADJUSTMENT ARM
29B1665-A / DOC
CONNECTOR ARM
Figure 5-7. Feedback Connection for Typical Long-Stroke
Sliding-Stem Actuator (4 to 24-Inches Travel)
Figure 5-6. Feedback Connection for Typical Sliding-Stem
Actuator (Up to 4-inch Travel)
Zero Pwr Cond
Identifies whether the valve is open or closed when
instrument power is lost. If you are unsure how to set
this parameter, disconnect the segment loop power to
the instrument. The resulting valve travel is the Zero
Power Condition.
Max Supply Press
Enter the maximum supply pressure in psi, bar, kPa,
or kg/cm2, depending on what was selected for
pressure units.
Aux Term Mode
The auxiliary terminal mode selections are Disabled,
Alert on Open or Close Contact, SIS Local Control
Panel or Push Button Partial Stroke Test. If the
LCP100 is not selected, the default is Partial Stroke
Test. If the LCP100 is selected during Setup Wizard or
enabled in Detailed Setup as Aux Terminal Mode −
SIS Local Control Panel, the following parameters will
be automatically set under Travel Alerts:
Hi Hi / Lo Lo Enable − YES
Lo Lo Point (%) − 1
Hi Hi Point (%) − 99
DVC Power Up − Manual Reset
Inst Date and Time
Date is a user-defined variable that provides a place to
save the date of the last revision of configuration or
calibration information.
May 2007
Calib Status and Loc (1-2-5-9)
Last Calib Status—Indicates the status of the
last instrument calibration.
Calib Loc—Indicates the location of the last
instrument calibration.
Valve & Actuator (1-2-6)
Select Configure / Setup, Detailed Setup, and Valve &
Actuator. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to configure the following
instrument parameters: Manufacturer, Valve Serial
Num (Valve Serial Number), Valve Style, Actuator
Style, Feedback Conn (Feedback Connection), and
Tvl Sensor Motion (Travel Sensor Motion).
Manufacturer
Enter the manufacturer of the actuator on which the
instrument is mounted. If the actuator manufacturer is
not listed, select Other.
Valve Serial Num
Enter the serial number for the valve in the application
with up to 12 characters.
5-21
5
DVC6000 SIS
Valve Style
Enter the valve style, rotary or sliding-stem.
Actuator Style
Max Travel Movement—Defines the maximum
displacement of partial stroke test signal from the
travel stop. Default value is 10%. It may be set to a
value between 1 and 30% in 0.1% increments.
Enter the actuator style, spring and diaphragm, piston
double-acting without spring, piston single-acting with
spring, or piston double-acting with spring.
Feedback Conn
Select Rotary All, SStem - Roller or SStem - Standard.
For rotary valves, enter Rotary - All, SStem - Roller.
5
For sliding-stem valves, if the feedback linkage
consists of a connector arm, adjustment arm, and
feedback arm (similar to figure 5-6), enter SStem Standard. If the feedback linkage consists of a roller
that follows a cam (similar to figure 5-7), enter Rotary
All, SStem - Roller.
Tvl Sensor Motion
Note
The Max Travel Movement is the
percentage of total span that the valve
moves away from its operating state
towards its fail state during a Partial
Stroke Test.
Stroke Speed—The stroke speed can be set for
1%/second, 0.5%/second, 0.25%/second,
0.12%/second, or 0.06%/second. The default value for
Partial Stroke Speed is 0.25%/second. For large size
actuators set the stroke speed to 0.06%/second.
Select Clockwise, or Counterclockwise. Travel Sensor
Motion establishes the proper travel sensor rotation.
Determine the rotation by viewing the end of the travel
sensor shaft from the perspective of the actuator.
Pause Time—The Setup Wizard sets the Partial
Stroke Pause Time to 5 seconds. This is the pause
time between the up and down strokes of the test. It
can be set for 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 seconds.
For instruments with Relay Type A and C: If
increasing air pressure at output A causes the shaft to
turn clockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the shaft
to turn counterclockwise, enter Counterclockwise.
PST Press Limit (single acting actuators)—During the
Setup Wizard or Auto Travel Calibration, the Partial
Stroke Pressure Limit will be set to a positive value for
single acting actuators. For those actuators that vent
from the test starting point, the pressure limit will be a
minimum value. For those actuators that fill from the
test starting point, the pressure limit will be a
maximum value. The pressure signal used for this
threshold depends on relay type and is summarized
below.
For instruments with Relay Type B: If increasing air
pressure at output B causes the shaft to turn
counterclockwise, enter Clockwise. If it causes the
shaft to turn clockwise, enter Counterclockwise.
SIS/Partial Stroke (1-2-7)
PST Enable
Yes or No. Enables or disables the Partial Stroke Test.
PST Vars View/Edit
Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display
to enter or view information for following PST
Variables: Max Travel Movement (Maximum Travel
Movement), Stroke Speed, Pause Time, PST Press
Limit (Partial Stroke Pressure Limit), PST Mode
Enable (Partial Stroke Enable), Pressure Set Point
(Pressure Set Point), and End Pt Contrl Enab (End
Point Control Enable). For more information on the
partial stroke test see Partial Stroke Test in Section 7.
5-22
Relay Type
Pressure Signal
A or C
B
B Special App.
C Special App.
Port A − Port B
Port B − Port A
Port B
Port A
PST Press Limit (double acting actuators)— During
the Setup Wizard or Auto Travel Calibration, the PST
Press Limit will be set to a negative value for actuators
where the Partial Stroke Start Point is opposite of the
Zero Power Condition (e.g., Partial Stroke Start Point
= Open and Zero Power Condition = Closed) and to a
positive valve for actuators where the Partial Stroke
Start Point is the same as the Zero Power Condition.
May 2007
Detailed Setup
ACTUAL TRACE FROM TEST (TYPICAL)
ACTUAL TRACE FROM TEST (TYPICAL)
5
ACTUAL TRACE FROM TEST (TYPICAL)
Figure 5-8. Time Series Plots of Travel Set Point, Travel, Error, and Actuator Pressure for a Typical Emergency Shutdown Valve
Manual SIS / Partial Stroke Parameter
Configuration
Table 5-9. Values for Disabling Partial Stroke Pressure Limit
Actuator
Type
Relay Type
Note
In order to manually set the partial
stroke pressure limit with the correct
value, you must be able to run a valve
signature test using AMS ValveLink
Software (see figure 5-8). It is then
possible to set the partial stroke
pressure limit with the Field
Communicator, using the information
generated by the valve signature test.
Thresholds for detecting a stuck valve are
automatically configured when the Setup Wizard or
Partial Stroke Calibration routines are run. However
thresholds can also be configured manually. To
manually configure thresholds, disable the travel
May 2007
Zero
Power
Condition
Closed
A or C
Open
Single
Acting
Closed
B
Open
Double
Acting
Closed
A
Open
Open
Partial
Stroke
Pressure
Limit
(Disabled)
0.0
Closed
Psupply
Open
Psupply
Partial
Stroke
Start Point
Closed
0.0
Open
Psupply
Closed
0.0
Open
0.0
Closed
Psupply
Open
−Psupply
Closed
Psupply
Open
Psupply
Closed
−Psupply
deviation alert by setting Travel Dev Alert Pt to 125%
(1-2-3-4-4-2). Also disable end point pressure control
(1-2-2-2-2-1) and disable the partial stroke pressure
limit (1-2-7-2) by setting the values shown in table 5-9.
5-23
DVC6000 SIS
Table 5-10. Estimates for Partial Stroke Pressure Limits
Actuator Style
Relay Type
Zero Power
Condition
PST Starting Point
Closed
A or C
Open
Spring and
Diaphragm
Closed
B
Open
Closed
A or C
Open
Single Acting Piston
Closed
B
5
Open
Closed
Double Acting Piston
A
Open
Partial Stroke Pressure Limit
Open
Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
Pmin − 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Closed
Pmax + 0.25 * (Bench Set High − Bench Set Low)
Open
0.5 * Pmin
Closed
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Open
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Closed
Open
0.5 * Pmin
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Closed
0.5 * Pmin
Open
0.5 * Pmin
Closed
Open
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Pmin − 0.5 * (Psupply + Pmin)
Closed
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Open
Pmax + 0.5 * (Psupply − Pmax)
Closed
Pmin − 0.5 * (Psupply + Pmin)
Run the partial stroke test using the 375 Field
Communicator. Once the test is completed, download
the partial stroke test results using AMS ValveLink
Software.
For double acting valves, the differential pressure is
used.
On the partial stroke graph page, select the
Tvl(%)/Time radio button to plot travel set point and
travel time series traces. The Travel Deviation Alert
Point should be set at least 1.5 times the maximum
deviation obtained from the time series plot. Maximum
Travel Movement should be set at least 5% above the
Travel Deviation Alert Point.
An interval of time (in days) between partial stroke
tests that are automatically run by the digital valve
controller, subject to the device being powered up. A
value of 0 disables this feature.
On the partial stroke graph page, select the
Press/Time radio button to plot the pressure trace. If
the actuator pressure starts high and moves low, find
the minimum actuator pressure. If the actuator
pressure starts low and moves high, find the maximum
actuator pressure. Use table 5-10 to estimate the
partial stroke pressure limit.
In the example shown in the middle graph of figure
5-8, the maximum travel deviation between travel set
point and travel is approximately 4%. Travel Deviation
Alert Point should be set to 1.5 x 4% = 6%. Max
Travel Movement should be set at 6% + 5% = 11%.
In the bottom graph of figure 5-8, with a single acting
piston actuator, fail closed, Relay A, and supply
pressure at 52 psig (read from instrument gauge),
Partial Stroke Pressure Limit is the minimum actuator
pressure attained during the test, i.e., 24 psig. Set the
Partial Stroke Pressure Limit to 0.5 * Pmin = 12 psig.
The default value is 0.
5-24
Auto Test Interval
DVC Power Up
Defines the power up behavior of the DVC6000. Auto
Reset allows the valve to track the command signal
when power is applied to the device. Manual Reset will
lock the device in its safety position until the digital
valve controller is reset.
If Manual Reset is selected, its state can be
determined from the status monitor by monitoring the
Locked In Safety Position alert.
When Aux Terminal Mode is set to SIS Local Control
Panel (LP100), DVC Power Up is set to Manual Reset
and cannot be changed to Auto Reset.
The reset signal depends on how the aux terminals
are configured. If configured for SIS Local Control
Panel, the digital valve controller can be reset by
pressing the button next to the green light on the
LCP100. If configured as Push Button Partial Stroke,
the digital valve controller can be reset by shorting the
aux terminals for more than 3 seconds but less than
10 seconds. The device cannot be reset from the aux
terminals if they are configured otherwise.
May 2007
Detailed Setup
Valve Stuck Alert
CAUTION
abort the test and issue an alert. It is recommended
that the Travel Deviation alert be enabled and
configured.
If a valve stuck alert is active, there
may be potential energy stored in the
valve and actuator assembly. Sudden
release of this energy may cause the
valve to suddenly open or close,
resulting in equipment damage.
The Valve Stuck alert will be generated either by the
Travel Deviation alert (the difference between
expected and actual travel exceeds the level defined
in the deviation alert), or if the actuator pressure
reaches the Partial Stroke pressure limit. If the Travel
Deviation alert is not configured, then the Partial
Stroke pressure limit will abort the test and cause the
Valve Stuck alert.
While performing the partial stroke test, even if the
valve sticks, the digital valve controller will not fully
exhaust or fill the actuator pressure in its attempt to
complete the partial stroke. Rather, the instrument will
If the valve is stuck and only the Travel Deviation alert
is enabled (without specifying partial stroke pressure
limit) the Valve Stuck alert will still be generated and
the test will be aborted.
5
May 2007
5-25
DVC6000 SIS
5
5-26
May 2007
Calibration
6-6
Section 6 Calibration
Calibration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Travel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Auto Travel Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Manual Travel Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Analog Calibration Adjust
Digital Calibration Adjust
Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Pressure Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6
Output Pressure Sensor Calibration
Supply Pressure Sensor Calibration
Travel Sensor Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
DVC6010 and DVC6030 Digital Valve Controllers
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controllers
Analog Input Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Relay Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Double-Acting Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Single-Acting Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
Single-Acting Direct
Single-Acting Reverse
May 2007
Restore Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
PST Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
6-1
DVC6000 SIS
Calibration Overview
When a DVC6000 Series digital valve controller is
ordered as part of a control valve assembly, the
factory mounts the digital valve controller on the
actuator and connects the necessary tubing, then sets
up and calibrates the controller.
For digital valve controllers that are ordered
separately, recalibration of the analog input or
pressure sensors generally is unnecessary. However,
after mounting on an actuator, perform the initial setup
(either auto or manual), then calibrate travel by
selecting Calibrate, Travel Calibration, and Auto Tvl
Calib (Auto Travel Calibration) from the Configure /
Setup menu. For more detailed calibration information,
refer to the following calibration procedures, available
from the Calibrate menu:
Travel Calibration
6
Auto Travel Calibrate —This procedure
automatically calibrates the travel. The calibration
procedure uses the valve and actuator stops as the
0% and 100% calibration points.
Manual Travel Calibrate —This procedure
permits manual calibration of the travel. This
calibration procedure allows you to determine the 0%
and 100% calibration points and obtain the optimum
linearity on a sliding-stem valve.
Relay Adjustment—This procedure permits
adjustment of the pneumatic relay.
Restore Factory Settings—This procedure permits
you to restore the calibration settings back to the
factory settings.
PST Calibration—This procedure permits you to run
the PST calibration procedure.
To display the calibrate menu, from the Online menu,
select Configure / Setup and Calibrate.
Note
The Instrument Mode must be Out Of
Service and the Protection set to None
before the instrument can be calibrated.
If you are operating in burst mode, we
recommend that you disable burst before
continuing calibration. Once calibration is
complete, burst mode may then be turned
back on.
Sensor Calibration
Pressure Sensor Calibration—This procedure
permits calibrating the three pressure sensors.
Normally the sensors are calibrated at the factory and
should not need calibration.
Travel Sensor Adjust—This procedure permits
calibrating the travel sensor. Normally the travel
sensor is calibrated at the factory. Calibrating the
travel sensor should only be necessary if the travel
sensor is replaced.
Analog In Calibration—This procedure permits
calibrating the analog input sensor. Normally the
sensor is calibrated at the factory and should not need
calibration.
Note
Analog Input is only available when
the DVC6000 SIS is operating in
Point-to-Point mode with 4−20 mA or
0−20 mA current.
WARNING
During calibration, the valve may
move. To avoid personal injury and
property damage caused by the
release of pressure or process fluid,
provide some temporary means of
control for the process.
Travel Calibration
There are two procedures available for calibrating
travel:
Automatically (Auto Tvl Calib)
Manually (Man Tvl Calib)
6-2
May 2007
Calibration
Auto Travel Calibrate (1-3-1-1)
ACTUATOR
STEM
User interaction is only required with Auto Calibrate
Travel when the feedback connection is SStem Standard (Sliding Stem - Standard). A feedback
connection of Rotary - All, SStem - Roller (Sliding
Stem - Roller) requires no user interaction and you
can start with step 6.
90_
For a SStem - Standard feedback connection,
interaction provides a more accurate crossover
adjustment. Setting crossover establishes the zero
degree point for the geometric correction used to
translate the rotary motion observed by the travel
sensor into the linear motion of the sliding-stem valve.
FEEDBACK ARM
When a double-acting actuator is used, you will be
prompted to run the Relay Adjustment when Auto
Travel Calibration is selected. Select Yes to adjust the
relay. Select No to proceed with Auto Travel
Calibration. For additional information, refer to Relay
Adjustment in this section.
Select Auto Tvl Calib from the Calibrate menu, then
follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display
to automatically calibrate travel.
1. Select the method of crossover adjustment:
manual, last value, or default. Manual is the
recommended choice. If you select Manual, the Field
Communicator will prompt you to adjust the crossover
in step 3.
If you select Last Value, the crossover setting
currently stored in the instrument is used and there
are no further user interactions with the
auto-calibration routine (go to step 6). Use this
selection if you cannot use manual, such as when you
cannot see the valve.
If you select Default, an approximate value for the
crossover is written to the instrument and there are no
further user interactions with the auto-calibration
routine (go to step 6). Use this selection only as a last
resort. Default assumes a midrange position on the
travel sensor as the crossover point, however, this
may not be an appropriate value to use for crossover
because of variations in mounting and travel sensor
calibration.
2. The instrument seeks the high and low drive points
and the minor loop feedback (MLFB) and output bias.
No user interaction is required in this step. For a
description of these actions see step 6.
3. If you select Manual in step 1, you are asked to
select an adjustment source, either analog or digital. If
you use a current source to adjust the crossover,
select Analog and go to step 4. If you wish to adjust
the current source digitally, select Digital and go to
step 5.
May 2007
6
A6536−3 / IL
Figure 6-1. Crossover Point
Note
The analog option is not available
when the DVC6000 SIS is operated by
0−24 VDC in Multidrop mode.
4. If you selected Analog as the crossover adjustment
source, the Field Communicator prompts you to adjust
the current source until the feedback arm is 90° to the
actuator stem, as shown in figure 6-1. After you have
made the adjustment, press OK and go to step 6.
5. If you selected Digital as the crossover adjustment
source, the Field Communicator displays a menu to
allow you to adjust the crossover.
Select the direction and size of change required to set
the feedback arm so it is 90° to the actuator stem, as
shown in figure 6-1. Selecting large, medium, and
small adjustments to the crossover causes changes of
approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to
the rotation of the feedback arm.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 5.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 6.
6. The remainder of the auto calibration procedure is
automatic.
During calibration, the instrument seeks the high and
low end points and the minor loop feedback (MLFB)
6-3
DVC6000 SIS
and output bias. By searching for the end points, the
instrument establishes the limits of physical travel, i.e.,
the actual travel 0 and 100% positions. This also
determines how far the relay beam swings to calibrate
the sensitivity of the beam position sensor.
Adjusting the minor loop feedback bias is done around
mid travel. The valve position is briefly moved back
and forth to determine the relay beam position at
quiescence. Essentially, it establishes the zero point
for the Minor Loop Feedback circuit. The back and
forth motion is performed to account for hysteresis.
Adjusting the output bias aligns the travel set point
with the actual travel by computing the drive signal
required to produce 0% error. This is done while the
valve is at 50% travel, making very small adjustments.
Calibration is complete when the “Auto Calibration has
completed” message appears.
6
Table 6-1. Auto Calibrate Travel Error Messages
Error Message
Possible Problem and Remedy
Input current must
exceed 3.8 mA for
calibration.
The analog input signal to the instrument
must be greater than 3.8 mA. Adjust the
current output from the control system or the
current source to provide at least 4.0 mA.
Place Out Of Service
and ensure Calibrate
Protection is disabled
before calib.
The Instrument Mode must be Out of Service
and the Protection must be None before the
instrument can be calibrated. For information
on changing instrument protection and mode,
see the beginning of this section.
Calibration Aborted.
An end point was not
reached.
The problem may be one or the other of the
following:
1. The tuning set selected is too low and the
valve does not reach an end point in the
allotted time. Press the Hot Key, select
Stabilize/Optimize then Increase Response
(selects next higher tuning set).
2. The tuning set selected is too high, valve
operation is unstable and does not stay at an
end point for the allotted time. Press the Hot
Key, select Stabilize/Optimize then Decrease
Response (selects next lower tuning set).
7. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
travel properly tracks the current source.
If the unit does not calibrate, refer to table 6-1 for error
messages and possible remedies.
Manual Travel Calibrate (1-3-1-2)
It is recommended that you adjust the relay before
manually calibrating travel. For additional information
refer to Relay Adjustment in this section.
Note
Relay Adjustment is only available for
the double-acting relay (Relay A).
Two procedures are available to manually calibrate
travel:
Analog Adjust
Invalid travel value.
Check travel sensor
and feedback arm
adjustments, and inst
supply press. Then,
repeat Auto Calib.
Prior to receiving this message, did the
instrument output go from zero to full supply?
If not, verify instrument supply pressure by
referring to the specifications in the
appropriate actuator instruction manual. If
supply pressure is correct, check instrument
pneumatic components (I/P converter and
relay).
If the instrument output did go from zero to
full supply prior to receiving this message,
then verify proper mounting by referring to the
appropriate mounting procedure in the
Installation section.
Verify travel sensor adjustment by performing
the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust
procedure in the Calibration section.
Making the crossover adjustment with the
valve positioned at either end of its travel will
also cause this message to appear.
From the Calibrate menu, select Man Tvl Calib and
Analog Adjust. Connect a variable current source to
the instrument LOOP + and LOOP − terminals. The
current source should be capable of generating 4 to 20
mA. Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator
display to calibrate the instrument’s travel in percent.
Digital Adjust
Analog Calibration Adjust
Note
0% Travel = Valve Closed
100% Travel = Valve Open
Note
Analog Calibration Adjust is only
available in 4−20 mA or 0−20 mA
systems (point-to-point operation).
6-4
1. Adjust the input current until the valve is near
mid-travel. Press OK.
2. If the feedback connection is Rotary - All, SStem Roller, go to step 6. If the feedback connection is
May 2007
Calibration
SStem - Standard, you are prompted to set the
crossover point. Adjust the current source until the
feedback arm is 90° to the actuator stem, as shown in
figure 6-1. Then press OK.
Note
In steps 3 through 7, the accuracy of
the current source adjustment affects
the position accuracy.
3. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0%
travel, then press OK.
4. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 100%
travel, then press OK.
10.0°, 1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback
arm rotation.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 1.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 2.
2. If the feedback connection is Rotary - All, SStem Roller, go to step 7. If the feedback connection is
SStem - Standard, adjust the feedback arm to the
crossover point by using the adjustment menu.
3. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the feedback arm so it
is 90° to the actuator stem, as shown in figure 6-1.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments to the
crossover causes changes of approximately 10.0°,
1.0°, and 0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm
rotation.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 3.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 4.
6. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 0%
travel, then press OK.
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel at 0%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
7. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 100%
travel, then press OK.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 4.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 5.
8. Adjust the current source until the valve is near 5%
travel, then press OK.
5. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 100%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
5. Adjust the current source until the valve is at 50%
travel, then press OK.
9. Adjust the current source until the valve is near
95% travel, then press OK.
10. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
travel properly tracks the current source.
Digital Calibration Adjust
From the Calibrate menu, select Man Tvl Calib and
Digital Adjust. Connect a variable current source to the
instrument LOOP + and LOOP − terminals. The
current source should be set between 4 and 20 mA.
Follow the prompts on the Field Communicator display
to calibrate the instrument’s travel in percent.
Note
0% Travel = Valve Closed
100% Travel = Valve Open
1. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to adjust the output until the
valve is near mid-travel. Selecting large, medium, and
small adjustments causes changes of approximately
May 2007
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 5.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 6.
6. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 50%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 6.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 7.
7. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 0%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 7.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 8.
8. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to 100%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
6-5
6
DVC6000 SIS
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 8.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 9.
9. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of change required to set the travel to near 5%.
Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 9.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 10.
10. From the adjustment menu, select the direction
and size of change required to set the travel to near
95%. Selecting large, medium, and small adjustments
causes changes of approximately 10.0°, 1.0°, and
0.1°, respectively, to the feedback arm rotation for a
sliding-stem valve or to the travel for a rotary valve.
If another adjustment is required, repeat step 10.
Otherwise, select Done and go to step 11.
6
11. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
travel properly tracks the current source.
12. After manual calibration is completed manually set
the SIS parameters as described in Section 5. See
page 5-13 for End Point Pressure Control; page 5-16
Travel Deviation Alert Point and Travel Deviation
Time; and page 5-22 for Partial Stroke Pressure Limit.
Sensor Calibration
Pressure Sensors (1-3-2-1)
There are three pressure sensors: output A, output B
and supply. Select the appropriate menu depending
upon which pressure sensor you are calibrating.
Note
The pressure sensors are calibrated at
the factory and should not require
calibration.
sensor you wish to calibrate, select either Output A
Sensor or Output B Sensor. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display to calibrate the
instrument’s output pressure sensor.
1. Adjust the supply pressure regulator to the desired
supply pressure. Press OK.
2. Select a) Zero only, or b) Zero and Span (gauge
required) sensor calibration.
a. If Zero only calibration is selected, wait until
output x pressure has completely exhausted, then
continue. Once calibration is completed, go to step
6. The output x pressure corresponds to A or B,
depending on which output you are calibrating.
b. If Zero and Span calibration is selected, wait
until output x pressure has completely exhausted,
then continue. You will then be asked to wait until
output x pressure has reached full supply, then
continue. The output x pressure corresponds to A
or B, depending on which output you are
calibrating. Proceed with step 3.
3. The instrument sets the output pressure to full
supply. The following message appears:
Use the Increase and
Decrease selections
until the displayed
pressure matches the
output x pressure.
The output x pressure corresponds to A or B,
depending on which output you are calibrating. Press
OK when you have read the message.
4. The value of the output pressure appears on the
display.
5. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 3.0 psi/0.207 bar/20.7 kPa,
0.30 psi/0.0207 bar/2.07 kPa, and 0.03 psi/0.00207
bar/0.207 kPa, respectively. Adjust the displayed value
until it matches the output pressure, select Done and
go to step 6.
6. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
displayed pressure matches the measured output
pressure.
Output Pressure Sensor Calibration
To calibrate the output pressure sensors, connect an
external reference gauge to the output being
calibrated. The gauge should be capable of measuring
maximum instrument supply pressure. From the
Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration and Press
Sensors (Pressure Sensors). Depending upon the
6-6
Supply Pressure Sensor Calibration
To calibrate the supply pressure sensor, connect an
external reference gauge to the output side of the
supply regulator. The gauge should be capable of
measuring maximum instrument supply pressure.
From the Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration,
May 2007
Calibration
Press Sensors (Pressure Sensors), and Supply
Sensor. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to calibrate the instrument’s
supply pressure sensor.
1. Select a) Zero Only, or b) Zero and Span (gauge
required).
Alignment Pin
(key 46)
Feedback Arm
(key 79)
a. If Zero Only calibration is selected, adjust the
supply pressure regulator to remove supply
pressure from the instrument. Press OK. Once
calibration is complete, go to step 5.
b. If Zero and Span calibration is selected, adjust
the supply pressure regulator to remove supply
pressure from the instrument. Press OK. Adjust the
supply regulator to the maximum instrument supply
pressure. Press OK. Proceed with step 2.
2. The following message appears:
Use the Increase and
Decrease selections until
the displayed pressure
matches the instrument
supply pressure.
Press OK when you have read this message.
A
Travel
Sensor
Shaft
B
A7023 / IL
Figure 6-2. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Showing
Feedback Arm in Position for Travel Sensor Adjustment
DVC6010 and DVC6030 Digital Valve
Controllers
WARNING
Failure to remove air pressure may
cause personal injury or property
damage from bursting parts.
3. The value of the pressure appears on the display.
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 3.0 psi/0.207 bar/20.7 kPa,
0.30 psi/0.0207 bar/2.07 kPa, and 0.03 psi/0.00207
bar/0.207 kPa, respectively. Adjust the displayed value
until it matches the supply pressure, select Done and
go to step 5.
5. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
displayed pressure matches the measured supply
pressure.
Travel Sensor Adjust (1-3-2-2)
The travel sensor is normally adjusted at the factory
and should not require adjustment. However, if the
travel sensor has been replaced, adjust the travel
sensor by performing the appropriate procedure. See
the Maintenance section for travel sensor replacement
procedures.
May 2007
1. Remove supply air and remove the instrument from
the actuator.
2. As shown in figure 6-2, align the feedback arm (key
79) with the housing by inserting the alignment pin
(key 46) through the hole marked “A” on the feedback
arm. Fully engage the alignment pin into the tapped
hole in the housing.
Note
The alignment pin (key 46) is
stored inside the digital valve
controller housing.
3. Loosen the screw that secures the feedback arm to
the travel sensor shaft. Position the feedback arm so
that the surface of the feedback arm is flush with the
end of the travel sensor shaft.
6-7
6
DVC6000 SIS
8. Disconnect the Field Communicator and current
source from the instrument.
BACK EDGE
OF ARM PARALLEL
W/BACK OF HOUSING
9. Remove the alignment pin and store it in the
instrument housing.
ARM ASSEMBLY
10. Install the digital valve controller on the actuator.
ARM ASSEMBLY PIN
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controllers
WARNING
Failure to remove air pressure may
cause personal injury or property
damage from bursting parts.
TRAVEL
SENSOR
SHAFT
BACK OF HOUSING
A7025 / IL
Figure 6-3. Type DVC6020 Travel Sensor Arm/Housing Back
Plane Alignment
6
Table 6-2. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Travel
Sensor Counts
Digital Valve Controller
Travel Sensor Counts
Type DVC6010
600 ±150
Type DVC6020
1950 ±150
Type DVC6030
600 ±150
4. Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP
− and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to
any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the Field
Communicator to the TALK terminals.
5. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, set
the instrument mode to Out Of Service and the
protection to None.
6. From the Calibrate menu select Sensor
Calibration,and Tvl Sensor Adjust (Travel Sensor
Adjust). Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to adjust the travel sensor
counts to the value listed in table 6-2.
1. Remove supply air and remove the instrument from
the actuator.
2. See figure 6-4 for parts identification. Disconnect
the bias spring (key 82) from the feedback arm
assembly (key 84) and the arm assembly (key 91).
Remove the mounting bracket (key 74) from the back
of the digital controller. Hold the arm assembly
(key 91) so that the arm assembly points toward the
terminal box and the arm is parallel to the back of the
housing, as shown in figure 6-3.
3. Loosen the screw that secures the arm assembly
to the travel sensor shaft. Position the arm assembly
so that the outer surface is flush with the end of the
travel sensor shaft.
4. Connect a current source to the instrument LOOP
− and LOOP + terminals. Set the current source to
any value between 4 and 20 mA. Connect the Field
Communicator to the TALK terminals.
5. Before beginning the travel sensor adjustment, set
the instrument mode to Out Of Service and the
protection to None.
6. From the Calibrate menu, select Sensor Calibration
and Tvl Sensor Adjust (Travel Sensor Adjust). Follow
the prompts on the Field Communicator display to
adjust the travel sensor counts to the value listed in
table 6-2.
Note
In the next step, be sure the feedback
arm surface remains flush with the end
of the travel sensor shaft.
7. While observing the travel sensor counts, tighten
the screw that secures the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain
within the tolerances listed in table 6-2. Paint the
screw to discourage tampering with the connection.
6-8
Note
In the next step, be sure the arm
assembly outer surface remains flush
with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
7. While observing the travel sensor counts, tighten
the screw that secures the arm assembly to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the travel sensor counts remain
May 2007
Calibration
MOUNTING
ADAPTER
(KEY 117)
CAP SCREW, HEX SOCKET
(KEY 116)
MOUNTING BRACKET
(KEY 74)
BIAS SPRING
(KEY 82)
CAP SCREW, HEX HEAD
(KEY 92)
6
ARM ASSEMBLY PIN
ARM ASSEMBLY
(KEY 91)
A7024 -2/ IL
FEEDBACK ARM
TORSION SPRING
(KEY 93)
FEEDBACK ARM ASSEMBLY
(KEY 84)
Figure 6-4. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Mounted on Type 1052, Size 33 Actuator
within the tolerances listed in table 6-2. Paint the
screw to discourage tampering with the connection.
8. Disconnect the Field Communicator and current
source from the instrument.
9. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the pin portion of the
May 2007
arm assembly (key 91).
10. Replace the mounting bracket on the back of the
instrument and reconnect the bias spring between the
feedback arm assembly and the arm assembly on the
travel sensor shaft.
11. Install the digital valve controller on the actuator.
6-9
DVC6000 SIS
Analog Input Calibration (1-3-2-3)
Note
Analog Input Calibration is only
available in 4-wire systems
(point-to-point operation).
6
To calibrate the analog input sensor, connect a
variable current source to the instrument LOOP+ and
LOOP− terminals. The current source should be
capable of generating an output of 4 to 20 mA. From
the Configure / Setup menu select Calibrate, Sensor
Calibration, and Analog In Calib (Analog Input
Calibration). Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to calibrate the analog input
sensor.
1. Set the current source to the target value shown on
the display. The target value is the Input Range Low
value. Press OK.
2. The following message appears:
Use Increase and
Decrease selections
until the displayed
current matches the
current source.
Press OK when you have read this message.
3. The value of the Analog Input appears on the
display.
4. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 0.4 mA, 0.04 mA, and 0.004
mA, respectively. Adjust the displayed value until it
matches the current source, select Done and go to
step 5.
5. Set the current source to the target value shown on
the display. The target value is the Input Range High
value. Press OK.
6. The following message appears:
6-10
Use Increase and
Decrease selections
until the displayed
current matches the
current source.
Press OK when you have read this message.
7. The value of the Analog Input appears on the
display.
8. From the adjustment menu, select the direction and
size of adjustment to the displayed value. Selecting
large, medium, and small adjustments causes
changes of approximately 0.4 mA, 0.04 mA, and 0.004
mA, respectively. Adjust the displayed value until it
matches the current source, select Done and go to
step 9.
9. Place the instrument In Service and verify that the
analog input displayed matches the current source.
Relay Adjustment (1-3-3)
Before beginning travel calibration, check the relay
adjustment. To check relay adjustment, select Relay
Adjust from the Calibrate menu, then follow the
prompts on the Field Communicator display. Replace
the digital valve controller cover when finished.
Note
Relay B and C are not user-adjustable.
Double-Acting Relay
The double-acting relay is designated by “Relay A” on
a label affixed to the relay itself. For double-acting
actuators, the valve must be near mid-travel to
properly adjust the relay. The Field Communicator will
automatically position the valve when Relay Adjust is
selected.
Rotate the adjustment disc, shown in figure 6-5, until
the output pressure displayed on the Field
Communicator is between 50 and 70% of supply
pressure. This adjustment is very sensitive. Be sure to
allow the pressure reading to stabilize before making
another adjustment (stabilization may take up to 30
seconds or more for large actuators).
Low bleed relay (standard for SIS) stabilization may
take approximately two minutes longer than the
standard relay.
May 2007
Calibration
LOW BLEED RELAY
DOES NOT HAVE
BLEED HOLES
FOR SINGLE-ACTING DIRECT RELAYS:
ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN THIS
DIRECTION UNTIL IT CONTACTS THE
BEAM
FOR DOUBLE-ACTING RELAYS:
ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN
THIS DIRECTION TO DECREASE
OUTPUT PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT DISC
6
FOR DOUBLE-ACTING RELAYS:
ROTATE ADJUSTMENT DISC IN
THIS DIRECTION TO INCREASE
OUTPUT PRESSURE
W9305
Figure 6-5. Location of Relay Adjustment (Shroud Removed for Clarity)
Single-Acting Relays
WARNING
If the unused port is monitoring
pressure, ensure that the pressure
source conforms to ISA Standard
7.0.01, and does not exceed the
pressure supplied to the instrument.
Failure to do so could result in
personal injury or property damage
caused by loss of process control.
Single-Acting Direct Relay
The single-acting direct relay is designated by “Relay
C” on a label affixed to the relay itself. Relay C
requires no adjustment.
May 2007
Single-Acting Reverse Relay
The single-acting reverse relay is designated by
“Relay B” on a label affixed to the relay itself. Relay B
is calibrated at the factory and requires no further
adjustment.
Restoring Factory Settings (1-3-4)
From the Online menu, select Configure / Setup, then
select Calibrate, and Restore Factory Settings. Follow
the prompts on the Field Communicator display to
restore calibration to the factory settings. You should
only restore the calibration if it is not possible to
calibrate an individual sensor. Restoring calibration
returns the calibration of all of the sensors and the
tuning set to their factory settings. Following
restoration of the factory calibration, the individual
sensors should be recalibrated.
6-11
DVC6000 SIS
PST Calibration (1-3-5)
Access PST Calibration by selecting PST Calibration
from the Calibrate menu. Follow the prompts on the
Field Communicator display to complete the PST
calibration.
This procedure permits you to run the Partial Stroke
Calibration, which enables the Partial Stroke Test. It
establishes values for Partial Stroke Pressure Limit,
Pressure Set Point and Pressure Saturation Time for
End Point Pressure Control, Travel Deviation Alert
Point and Travel Deviation Time. The Partial Stroke
Calibration also sets default values for max travel
movement, test speed, and test pause time.
Note
You must take the instrument out of
service before running Partial Stroke
Calibration.
Ensure that the instrument is put back
in service after the completing the
calibration procedure.
6
6-12
May 2007
Viewing Device Information
7-7
Section 7 Viewing Device Information
Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
Alert Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
Electronic Alerts
Sensor Alerts
Environmental Alerts
Travel Alerts
Travel History Alerts
SIS Alerts
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
Device Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
7
Temp Max
Temp Min
Run Time
Number of Power Ups
Stroke Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
Partial Stroke Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5
Device (Digital Valve Controller)
Auxiliary Terminal
Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines
Model 375 Field Communicator
Additional SIS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demand Mode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid Valve Health Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8
Device Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
Travel Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
Drive Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
Pressure A
Pressure B
Pressure Differential
Supply Pressure
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
Auxiliary Input
May 2007
7-1
DVC6000 SIS
Temperature
Temperature Maximum
Temperature Minimum
Cycle Count
Tvl Accum
Raw Travel Input
Run Time
Number of Power Ups
Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10
HART Tag
Device ID
Manufacturer
Model
Device Revision
Firmware Revision
Hardware Revision
Instrument Level
HART Universal Revision
DD Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7-2
7-10
May 2007
Viewing Device Information
Device Diagnostics
Alert Conditions (2-1)
Instrument Alert Conditions, when enabled, detect
many operational and performance issues that may be
of interest. To view these alerts, from the Online menu
select Device Diagnostics, and Alert Conditions. The
alert conditions for each group of alerts are listed
below. If there are no alerts active for a particular
group the group will not be displayed on the Field
Communicator.
Electronics— If an electronics alert is active it
will appear under ELECT ALERTS.
Drive Current
Drive Current Alert—This alert is indicated when the
drive current does not read as expected. If this alert
occurs, check the connection between the I/P
converter and the printed wiring board assembly. Try
removing the I/P converter and re-installing it. If the
failure does not clear, replace the I/P converter or the
printed wiring board assembly.
Drive Signal
Drive Signal Alert—This alert is indicated when the
Drive Signal is greater or less than the expected
maximum or minimum.
Processor Impaired
Offline/Failed Alert—This alert is indicated if a
failure, enabled from the Self Test Shutdown menu,
caused an instrument shutdown. Press Enter to see
which of the specific failures caused the Offline/Failed
indication.
Power Starvation Alert—This alert is indicated if the
instrument does not have enough power to function
properly.
Non-Critical NVM Alert—This alert is indicated if the
checksum for data, which are not critical for instrument
operation, has failed.
Critical NVM Alert—This alert is indicated when the
Non-Volatile Memory integrity test fails. Configuration
data is stored in NVM. If this failure is indicated,
restart the instrument and see if it clears. If it does not
clear, replace the PWB Assembly.
Flash ROM Alert—This alert indicates that the Read
Only Memory integrity test failed. If this alert is
indicated, restart the instrument and see if it clears. If
it does not clear, replace the printed wiring board
assembly.
No Free Time Alert—This alert is indicated if the
instrument is unable to complete all of the configured
tasks. This will not occur with a properly functioning
instrument.
May 2007
Reference Voltage Alert—This failure is indicated
whenever there is a failure associated with the internal
voltage reference. If this alert is indicated, restart the
instrument and see if it clears. If it does not clear,
replace the printed wiring board assembly.
Internal Sensor Out of Limits—This alert is indicated
if there is a possible problem with either the pressure
sensor or the printed wiring board assembly
submodule.
Variable Out of Range—This alert is indicated if
there is a possible problem with one or more of the
following: the Analog Input Signal, the I/P converter
submodule, the pneumatic relay submodule, or the
printed wiring board.
Field device malfunction—The alert is indicated if
the pressure, position, or temperature sensors are
providing invalid readings.
Sensor— If a sensor alert is active it will appear
under SENSOR ALERTS.
Travel Sensor
Travel Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated if the
sensed travel is outside the range of −25.0 to 125.0%
of calibrated travel. If this alert is indicated, check the
instrument mounting and the travel sensor adjustment.
Also, check that the electrical connection from the
travel sensor is properly plugged into the printed wiring
board assembly. After restarting the instrument, if the
alert does not clear, troubleshoot the printed wiring
board assembly or travel sensor.
Pressure Sensors
Pressure Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated if the
actuator pressure is outside the range of −24.0 to
125.0% of the calibrated pressure for more than 60
seconds. If this alert is indicated, check the instrument
supply pressure. If the failure persists, ensure the
printed wiring board assembly is properly mounted
onto the Module Base Assembly, and the pressure
sensor O-rings are properly installed. If the alert does
not clear after restarting the instrument, replace the
printed wiring board assembly.
Note
The pressure sensor alert is used for
output A, output B, and the supply
pressure sensor. Check the pressure
values to see which sensor is causing
the alert.
Temperature Sensor
Temperature Sensor Alert—This alert is indicated
when the instrument temperature sensor fails, or the
7-3
7
DVC6000 SIS
sensor reading is outside of the range of −40 to 85C
(−40 to 185F). The temperature reading is used
internally for temperature compensation of inputs. If
this alert is indicated, restart the instrument and see if
it clears. If it does not clear, replace the printed wiring
board assembly.
Table 7-1. Alerts Included in Alert Groups for Alert Record
Alert Group
Valve Alerts
Environment— If an environment alert is active
it will appear under ENVIRO ALERTS.
Supply Pressure
Supply Pressure Lo Alert—This alert is indicated
when supply pressure is lower than the configured
limit.
Aux Terminal Alert
Aux Terminal Alert—This alert is set when the
auxiliary input terminals are either open or closed,
depending upon the selection for the Aux In Alrt State.
Travel— If a travel alert is active it will appear
under TRAVEL ALERTS.
7
Travel Deviation
Travel Deviation Alert—The difference between
Setpoint and Travel is greater than the configured
limits.
Travel Limit
Travel Alert Hi Hi—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is greater than the configured limit.
Travel Alert Lo Lo—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is lower than the configured limit.
Travel Limit Hi/Lo
Travel Alert Hi—This alert is indicated if the Travel
is greater than the configured limit.
Travel Alert Lo—This alert is indicated if the Travel
is lower than the configured limit.
Travel Limit / Cutoff
Travel Limit/Cutoff Hi—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is limited high or the high cutoff is in effect.
Travel Limit/Cutoff Lo—This alert is indicated if the
Travel is limited low or the low cutoff is in effect.
Travel History— If a travel history alert is active
it will appear under TVL HIST ALERTS.
Failure Alerts
Miscellaneous Alerts
Travel Alert Lo
Travel Alert Hi
Travel Alert Lo Lo
Travel Alert Hi Hi
Travel deviation
Drive signal
No free time
Flash ROM fail
Drive current fail
Ref Voltage fail
NVM fail
Temperature sensor fail
Pressure sensor fail
Travel sensor fail
Auxiliary input
SIS— If an SIS alert is active it will appear under
SIS ALERTS.
Partial Stroke Test (PST)
Valve Stuck or Pressure/Travel Path
Obstructed—This alert is indicated if the valve is stuck
or the pressure/travel path is obstructed.
End Point Pressure Deviation
Pressure Deviation Alert—The alert is indicated if
the difference between the target pressure and the
actual pressure exceeds the Pressure Deviation Alert
Point for a period of time greater than the Pressure
Deviation Time.
Locked in Safety Alert—This alert is indicated if the
unit is locked in the safety position.
SIS Panel Comm Error—This alert is indicated if the
SIS panel is not communicating.
Alert Record
Alert Record not Empty—This alert indicates that an
alert has been saved to the alert record.
Alrt Record Full—This alert indicates that the alert
record is full.
Viewing Instrument Status (2-2)
To view the instrument status, from the Device
Diagnostics menu select Status. This menu item
indicates the status of the Operational items listed
below. The status of more than one operational item
may be indicated.
Cycle Count
Cycle Count Alert—This alert is indicated if the
Cycle Counter exceeds the Cycle Count Alert Point.
Instrument Time
Travel Accumulator
Travel Accumulator Alert—This alert is indicated if
the Travel Accum exceeds the Travel Accumulator
Alert Point.
Cal in Progress
7-4
Alerts Include in Group
Inst Time Invalid
Calibration and Diagnostics
Autocal in Progress
Diag in Progress
May 2007
Viewing Device Information
Diag Data Avail
Operational
Step to Target—steps the travel to the specified
target.
Press Ctrl Active
Multi-Drop
Partial Stroke Test (2-5)
Integrator
Integrator Sat Hi
Integrator Sat Lo
Device Record (2-3)
From the Online menu, select Device Diagnostics and
Device Record. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to view the following Device
Record parameters: Temp Max (Maximum
Temperature), Temp Min (Minimum Temperature),
Run Time, and Num of Power Ups (Number of Power
Ups).
Temp Max—Maximum Recorded Temperature
shows the maximum temperature the instrument has
experienced since installation.
Temp Min—Minimum Recorded Temperature
shows the minimum temperature the instrument has
experienced since installation.
Run Time—Indicates in hours or days the total
elapsed time the instrument has been powered up.
Num of Power Ups—Number of Power Ups
indicates how many times the instrument has cycled
power.
Stroking the Digital Valve Controller
Output (2-4)
From the Online menu, select Device Diagnostics and
Stroke Valve. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to select from the following:
Done, Ramp Open, Ramp Closed, Ramp to Target,
Step to Target, and Stop.
Done—Select this if you are done. All ramping is
stopped when DONE is selected.
WARNING
During the partial stroke test the valve
will move. To avoid personal injury
and property damage caused by the
release of pressure or process fluid,
when used in an application where
the valve is normally closed, provide
some temporary means of control for
the process.
The Partial Stroke Test allows the DVC6000 Series
digital valve controllers with instrument level SIS to
perform a Valve Signature type of test while the
instrument is in service and operational. In SIS
applications, it is important to be able to exercise and
test the valve to verify that it will operate when
commanded. This feature allows the user to partially
stroke the valve while continually monitoring the input
signal. If a demand arises, the test is aborted and the
valve moves to its commanded position. The partial
stroke valve travel is configurable between 1 and 30%
maximum travel, in 0.1% increments. Data from the
last partial stroke test is stored in the instrument
memory for retrieval by AMS ValveLink Software.
The Partial Stroke Test allows you to perform a partial,
10%, stroke test (standard) or a custom stroke test.
With the custom stroke test, the stroke may be
extended up to 30%. Be sure to check plant guidelines
before performing a custom stroke test. The purpose
of this test is to ensure that the valve assembly moves
upon demand.
A partial stroke test can be initiated when the valve is
operating at either 4 or 20 mA (point-to-point mode). In
applications where a spurious trip is to be minimized, 4
mA is the normal operating position.
Ramp Open—ramps the travel toward open at
the rate of 1.0% per second of the ranged travel.
When enabled, a partial stroke test may be initiated by
the device (as a scheduled, auto partial stroke test), a
remote push button located in the field or at the valve,
the optional LCP100 local control panel, the Model 375
Field Communicator, or AMS ValveLink Software.
Ramp Closed—ramps the travel toward closed at
the rate of 1.0% per second of the ranged travel.
Device (Digital Valve Controller)
Ramp to Target—ramps the travel to the
specified target at the rate of 1.0% per second of the
ranged travel.
May 2007
The Auto Partial Stroke Test allows the partial stroke
test to be scheduled by the DVC6000. The test is
scheduled in number of hours between tests. Any
power cycle will reset the test interval timer.
7-5
7
DVC6000 SIS
The black “Valve Test” push button (see figure 7-1)
allows the valve to perform the configured partial
stroke test.
Press and hold for 3 to 10 seconds
The test can be overridden by the “Valve Close”
button, “Valve Open” button, or if an emergency
demand occurs.
Local DI
PRESS TO PERFORM
THE CONFIGURED
PARTIAL STROKE
TEST
When configured by the user interface, the Auxiliary
Terminal can be used as a discrete input from a
pressure switch, temperature switch, etc., to provide
an alert.
Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines
The Auxiliary Input Terminals of a DVC6000 with
instrument level SIS can be used with a
locally-mounted switch for initiating a partial stroke
test. Some applications require that the partial stroke
test be initiated from a remote location.
7
Figure 7-1. Local Control Panel
Auxiliary Terminal
The auxiliary terminal can be used for different
applications. The default configuration is for a partial
stroke test initiated by shorting the contacts wired to
the auxiliary +/− terminals of the DVC6000. Refer to
Auxiliary Terminal Wiring Length Guidelines below.
Local Push Button
A partial stroke test command may be sent to the
DVC6000 Series digital valve controller using a set of
contacts wired to the auxiliary +/− terminals. To
perform a test, the contacts must be closed for 3 to 5
seconds and then opened. To abort the test, close the
contacts for 1 second. The last set of diagnostic data
is stored in the instrument memory for later retrieval
via AMS ValveLink Software.
Local Control Panel
The LCP100 local control panel is wired directly to the
DVC6000 SIS digital valve controller.
7-6
The length for wiring connected to the Auxiliary Input
Terminals is limited by capacitance. For proper
operation of the Auxiliary Input Terminals capacitance
should not exceed 18000 pF. As with all control signal
wiring, good wiring practices should be observed to
minimize adverse effect of electrical noise on the Aux
Switch function.
Example Calculation: Capacitance per foot or per
meter is required to calculate the length of wire that
may be connected to the Aux switch input. The wire
should not exceed the capacitance limit of 18000 pF.
Typically the wire manufacturer supplies a data sheet
which provides all of the electrical properties of the
wire. The pertinent parameter is the highest possible
capacitance. If shielded wire is used, the appropriate
number is the “Conductor to Other Conductor &
Shield” value.
Example — 18AWG Unshielded Audio, Control
and Instrumentation Cable
Manufacturer’s specifications include:
Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1 KHz: 26 pF/ft
Nom. Conductor DC Resistance @ 20 Deg. C: 5.96 Ohms/1000 ft
Max. Operating Voltage − UL 200 V RMS (PLTC, CMG),150 V RMS
(ITC)
Allowable Length with this cable = 18000pF /(26pF/ft) = 692 ft
Example — 18AWG Shielded Audio, Control and
Instrumentation Cable
Manufacturer’s specifications include:
Nom. Characteristic Impedance: 29 Ohms
Nom. Inductance: .15 μH/ft
May 2007
Viewing Device Information
Nom. Capacitance Conductor to Conductor @ 1 KHz: 51 pF/ft
Demand Mode Tests
Nom. Cap. Cond. to other Cond. & Shield @ 1 KHz 97 pF/ft
The following steps assume the use of single acting
spring and diaphragm actuators or double-acting
spring assist piston actuators.
Allowable Length with this cable = 18000pF /(97pF/ft) = 185 ft
The AUX switch input passes less than 1 mA through
the switch contacts, and uses less than 5V, therefore,
neither the resistance nor the voltage rating of the
cable are critical. Ensure that switch contact corrosion
is prevented. It is generally advisable that the switch
have gold-plated or sealed contacts.
Model 375 Field Communicator
1. Connect the Model 375 Field Communicator to the
LOOP terminals on the digital valve controller.
2. Turn on the Field Communicator.
3. From the Online menu, select Device Diagnostics
and Partial Stroke Test.
4. Select either Standard (10%) or Custom. With the
Custom Stroke Test, the stroke may be entered up to
30% with configurable stroking speed and pause time.
5. The currently configured Stroke, Stroking Speed,
and Pause Time is displayed. Choose “Yes” to run the
test using these values. Choose “No” to modify the
values. The default value for Stroke Speed is
0.25%/second.
6. The valve begins to move and the actual travel
reported by the digital valve controller is displayed on
the Field Communicator.
7. Once the valve has reached the endpoint, check
that the valve has reached the desired set point. The
valve should return to its original position.
For information on configuring the Partial Stroke Test,
see Partial Stroke Variables in the Detailed Setup
section.
Perform the following steps to confirm valve operation:
a. Point-to-Point Mode (DVC6000 powered with
4−20 mA current source)
If the DVC6000 is in series with a solenoid valve,
1. Disconnect the power from the solenoid valve,
but maintain the 20 mA current to the digital valve
controller. The valve should move to its “fail safe”
position.
2. Maintain power to the solenoid valve and adjust
the current to the digital valve controller from
20 mA to 4mA. The valve should move to its “fail
safe” position.
3. Remove power from the solenoid valve and
adjust the current to the digital valve controller
from 20mA to 4mA. The valve should go to its “fail
safe” position.
If a solenoid is not used with a DVC6000,
1. Adjust the current to the digital valve controller
from 20 mA to 4 mA. The valve should move to its
“fail safe” position.
Note
The above tests are applicable for
single-acting direct relays A and C. If
single-acting reverse relay B is used
adjust the current from 4 mA (normal
state) to 20 mA (trip state).
Additional SIS Diagnostics
b. Multidrop Mode (DVC6000 is powered by a
24 VDC power source)
Manual Reset
If the DVC6000 is in series with a solenoid valve, and
shares a single power source,
The DVC6000 Series digital valve controller in SIS
applications can be configured to hold the trip state
until a local reset button is pressed. It is configurable
by the 375 Field Communicator or AMS ValveLink
Software. Manual Reset can be initiated by shorting
the AUX terminals with a user-supplied push button for
at least 3 seconds, but less than 5 seconds or by
pressing the button next to the green light on the
optional LCP100 local control panel when the current
is at it’s normal state. The digital valve controller will
drive the valve to its normal operating position.
May 2007
Disconnect power to both devices. The valve
should go to its “fail safe” position.
If the DVC6000 is in series with a solenoid valve, with
independent power sources,
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the solenoid
valve and a second 24 VDC power supply to the
DVC6000. Disconnect the solenoid valve power
supply, but maintain the power supply to the
7-7
7
DVC6000 SIS
DVC6000. The valve should go to its “fail safe”
position quickly. Then, maintain the power supply
to the solenoid valve and disconnect the DVC6000
power supply. The valve should go to its “fail safe”
position, although not as quickly as it does in the
previous scenario.
If DVC6000 is alone, without a solenoid valve,
Disconnect power to the digital valve controller.
The valve should go to its “fail safe” position.
Note
The above tests are not applicable for
single-acting reverse relay B when no
solenoid valve is present.
7
If the LCP100 is used, conduct the following tests:
Note
You may remove the power
completely; however, the lights in
step 3 will be off. Without power to the
DVC6000, the LCP100 cannot function.
2. Observe that the valve moves to its fail safe
state.
3. Observe that the red light comes on solid and
the amber light stays off (valve is not ready to
open).
4. Press the push button next to the green light
and observe that the valve does not move.
5. Increase the current to the DVC6000 to 20 mA
and observe that the valve remains in its fail safe
state.
6. Observe that the red light stays on solid and
the amber light comes on solid (ready to reset).
7. Press the push button next to the green light.
Successful Partial Stroke Test
1. Press the “Valve Test” (black) push button for
more than 3 seconds (but less than 10 seconds).
2. Observe that the green light starts flashing
when the valve starts moving.
3. Observe that the valve moves no more than
the configured PST travel limit.
4. Observe that the valve returns to the normal
operating position and the green light comes on
solid.
Manually Aborted Partial Stroke Test
1. Press the “Valve Test” (black) push button for
more than 3 seconds (but less than 10 seconds).
2. Observe that the green light starts flashing
when the valve starts moving.
3. Before the valve reaches the travel limit of the
configured partial stroke test, press the “Valve
Test” push button, or the push button next to the
green light.
4. Observe that the valve immediately returns to
the normal operating position and the green light
comes on solid.
Emergency Demand through the Logic Solver
1. Reduce the current to the DVC6000 to 4 mA
for de-energize to trip operation.
7-8
8. Observe that the green light starts flashing,
then becomes solid and the red light is off.
Emergency Demand through Local Control Panel
1. Press the push button next to the red light.
2. Observe that the valve moves to it fail safe
position.
3. Observe that the red light starts flashing, then
becomes solid and the amber light comes on solid
(ready to reset).
4. Press the push button next to the green light.
5. Observe that the red light goes off, the valve
moves to its normal operating position, and the
green light comes on solid.
Solenoid Valve Health Monitoring
The following steps assume the use of a single-acting
actuator with a solenoid valve installed. The DVC6000
digital valve controller, with single-acting, direct relay
C, must be powered separately from the solenoid. The
unused output of the DVC6000 must be connected
between the solenoid and the actuator as described in
the Installation section. The relay configuration
selection must be “special application” and AMS
ValveLink Software must have the triggered profile
enabled.
1. When allowed by the Logic Solver, momentarily
remove and then restore power to the solenoid
(typically 100 to 200 milliseconds). This process
May 2007
Viewing Device Information
should occur quickly enough that the valve assembly
does not move when the solenoid is de-energized.
2. With AMS ValveLink Software, upload the
diagnostic data from the triggered profile menu.
3. Examine the graph and observe that there was a
change in the pressure reading downstream of the
solenoid.
Device Variables
The following menus are available to define and/or
view information about the instrument. From the
Online menu select Device Variables.
Analog In (3-1)
Analog Input shows the value of the instrument analog
input in mA (milliamperes) or % (percent) of ranged
input.
Tvl Set Pt (3-2)
Travel Set Point shows the requested valve position in
% of ranged travel.
Travel (3-3)
Travel shows the value of the DVC6000 Series digital
valve controller travel in % (percent) of ranged travel.
Travel always represents how far the valve is open.
Drive Signal (3-4)
Drive Signal shows the value of the instrument drive
signal in % (percent) of maximum drive.
Pressures (3-5)
Shows the value of the instrument supply and output
pressures in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2. Also shows the
output pressure differential. To display pressures may
require selecting the variable; a detail display of that
variable with its values will appear.
Pressure A— Pressure A shows the value of
Output Pressure A in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
Pressure B— Pressure B shows the value of
Output Pressure A in psi, bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
Pressure Diff—Pressure Differential shows the
value of the output pressure differential in psi, bar,
kPa, or kg/cm2.
Supply Pressure—Supply Pressure displays the
instrument supply pressure in psi ,bar, kPa, or kg/cm2.
May 2007
Variables (3-6)
The Variables menu is available to view additional
variables, including; Aux Input (Auxiliary Input),
Temperature, Temp Max (Maximum Temperature),
Temp Min (Minimum Temperature), Cycle Count, Tvl
Accum (Travel Accumulator), Raw Tvl Input (Raw
Travel Input), Run Time, and Num of Power Ups
(Number of Power Ups).
To view one of these variables, from the Online menu
select Device Variables and Variables. If a value for a
variable does not appear on the display, select the
variable and a detailed display of that variable with its
value will appear. A variable’s value does not appear
on the menu if the value becomes too large to fit in the
allocated space on the display, or if the variable
requires special processing, such as Aux Input.
Aux Input—The Auxiliary Input is a discrete input
that can be used with an independent limit or pressure
switch. Its value is either open or closed.
Temperature—The internal temperature of the
instrument is displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit or
Celsius.
Temp Max—Maximum Recorded Temperature
shows the maximum temperature the instrument has
experienced since installation.
Temp Min—Minimum Recorded Temperature
shows the minimum temperature the instrument has
experienced since installation.
Cycle Count—Cycle Counter displays the
number of times the valve travel has cycled. Only
changes in direction of the travel after the travel has
exceeded the deadband are counted as a cycle. Once
a new cycle has occurred, a new deadband around
the last travel is set. The value of the Cycle Counter
can be reset from the Cycle Count Alert menu. See
page 5-17 of the Detailed Setup section for additional
information.
Tvl Accum—Travel Accumulator contains the
total change in travel, in percent of ranged travel. The
accumulator only increments when travel exceeds the
deadband. Then the greatest amount of change in one
direction from the original reference point (after the
deadband has been exceeded) will be added to the
Travel Accumulator. The value of the Travel
Accumulator can be reset from the Travel Accum
menu. See page 5-17 of the Detailed Setup section for
additional information.
7-9
7
DVC6000 SIS
Table 7-2. Functions Available for Instrument Level
Note
Do not use the following raw travel
input indication for calibrating the
travel sensor. The following should
only be used for a relative indication to
be sure the travel sensor is working
and that it is moving in the correct
direction. Perform the Travel Sensor
Adjust procedure in the Calibration
section to calibrate the travel sensor.
Raw Tvl Input—Raw travel input indicates the
travel sensor position in analog-to-digital converter
counts. When the travel sensor is operating correctly,
this number changes as the valve strokes.
Run Time—Indicates in hours or days the total
elapsed time the instrument has been powered up.
7
Num of Power Ups—Number of Power Ups
Indicates how many times the instrument has cycled
power.
Device Information (3-7)
The Device Information menu is available to view
information about the instrument. From the Online
menu, select Device Variables and Device
Information. Follow the prompts on the Field
Communicator display to view information in the
following fields: HART Tag, Device ID, Manufacturer,
Model, Device Rev (Device Revision), Firmware Rev
(Firmware Revision), Hardware Rev (Hardware
Revision), Inst Level (Instrument Level), and HART
Univ Rev (HART Universal Revision).
Hart Tag—A HART tag is a unique name (up to
eight characters) that identifies the physical
instrument.
Device ID—Each instrument has a unique Device
Identifier. The device ID provides additional security to
prevent this instrument from accepting commands
meant for other instruments.
7-10
Functions Available
Communicates with Model 375 Field Communicator and AMS
ValveLink Software. Provides: travel cutoffs and limits, minimum
opening and closing times, input characterization (linear, equal
percentage, quick opening, and custom), trending with ValveLink
Solo, and the following alerts: travel deviation; travel alert high, low,
high high, and low low; drive signal; auxiliary terminal; cycle counter;
and travel accumulation. With AMS ValveLink Software, all offline
diagnostic tests (dynamic error band, drive signal, step response, and
valve signature) plus online trending and partial stroke test
Manufacturer—Identifies the manufacturer of the
instrument.
Model—Identifies the instrument model.
Device Rev—Device Revision is the revision
number of the software for communication between
the Field Communicator and the instrument.
Firmware Rev—Firmware Revision is the revision
number of the firmware in the instrument.
Hardware Rev—Hardware Revision is the
revision number of the electrical circuitry within the
instrument printed wiring board.
Inst Level—Indicates the instrument level − SIS
Table 7-2 lists the functions available instrument level
SIS.
HART Univ Rev—HART Universal Revision is
the revision number of the HART Universal
Commands which are used as the communications
protocol for the instrument.
DD Information (3-8)
DD Information contains the device description in the
Field Communicator. To access DD Information from
the Online menu, select Device Variables and DD
Information.
May 2007
Principle of Operation
8-8
Section 8 Principle of Operation
HARTR Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Digital Valve Controller Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
8
May 2007
8-1
DVC6000 SIS
+0.5 mA
CONTROL SYSTEM
0
ANALOG
SIGNAL
−0.5 mA
HART
MODEM
1200 Hz
“1”
2200 Hz
“0”
AVERAGE CURRENT CHANGE DURING COMMUNICATION = 0
A6174/IL
Figure 8-1. HART Frequency Shift Keying Technique
FIELD
TERM.
HARTR Communication
8
The HART (Highway Addressable Remote
Transducer) protocol gives field devices the capability
of communicating instrument and process data
digitally. This digital communication occurs over the
same two-wire loop that provides the 4–20 mA
process control signal, without disrupting the process
signal. In this way, the analog process signal, with its
faster update rate, can be used for control. At the
same time, the HART protocol allows access to digital
diagnostic, maintenance, and additional process data.
The protocol provides total system integration via a
host device.
The HART protocol uses frequency shift keying (FSK).
Two individual frequencies of 1200 and 2200 Hz are
superimposed over the 4–20 mA current signal. These
frequencies represent the digits 1 and 0 (see figure
8-1). By superimposing a frequency signal over the
4–20 mA current, digital communication is attained.
The average value of the HART signal is zero,
therefore no dc value is added to the 4–20 mA signal.
Thus, true simultaneous communication is achieved
without interrupting the process signal.
The HART protocol allows the capability of
multidropping, i.e., networking several devices to a
single communications line. This process is well suited
for monitoring remote applications such as pipelines,
custody transfer sites, and tank farms. See table 9-3
for instructions on changing the printed wiring board
DIP switch configuration to multidrop.
Digital Valve Controller Operation
The DVC6000 Series digital valve controller housing
contains the travel sensor, terminal box, pneumatic
input and output connections and a module base that
may be easily replaced in the field without
disconnecting field wiring or tubing. This master
module contains the following submodules: I/P
8-2
A6761 / IL
Figure 8-2. Typical FIELDVUE R Instrument to Personal
Computer Connections for AMS ValveLink R Software
converter, printed wiring board (pwb) assembly, and
pneumatic relay. The module base can be rebuilt by
replacing the submodules. See figures 8-4 and 8-5.
Process Applications
DVC6000 Series digital valve controllers are
loop-powered instruments that provide a control valve
position proportional to an input signal from the control
room. The following describes a double-acting Type
DVC6010 digital valve controller mounted on a piston
actuator.
The input signal is routed into the terminal box through
a single twisted pair of wires and then to the printed
wiring board assembly submodule where it is read by
the microprocessor, processed by a digital algorithm,
and converted into an analog I/P drive signal.
As the input signal increases, the drive signal to the
I/P converter increases, increasing the I/P output
pressure. The I/P output pressure is routed to the
pneumatic relay submodule. The relay is also
connected to supply pressure and amplifies the small
pneumatic signal from the I/P converter. The relay
accepts the amplified pneumatic signal and provides
two output pressures. With increasing input (4 to 20
mA signal), the output A pressure always increases
and the output B pressure decreases. The output A
pressure is used for double-acting and single-acting
direct applications. The output B pressure is used for
May 2007
Principle of Operation
4−20 mA
+
HART
INPUT SIGNAL
AUXILIARY
TERMINALS
TERMINAL BOX
VALVE TRAVEL
FEEDBACK
PRINTED
WIRING BOARD
DRIVE
SIGNAL
OUTPUT A
I/P
CONVERTER
PNEUMATIC
RELAY
SUPPLY
PRESSURE
OUTPUT B
8
VALVE AND ACTUATOR
E0408 / IL
Figure 8-3. Figure 8-4. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Block Diagram
double-acting and single-acting reverse applications.
For single-acting actuators, unused ports can also be
used to monitor the actuator pressure if any
accessories are used in the output of the digital valve
controller. As shown in figure 8-4 the increased output
A pressure causes the actuator stem to move
downward. Stem position is sensed through the
feedback linkage by the travel sensor which is
electrically connected to the printed wiring board
assembly submodule. The stem continues to move
downward until the correct stem position is attained.
At this point the printed wiring board assembly
stabilizes the I/P drive signal. This positions the
flapper to prevent any further increase in nozzle
pressure.
As the input signal decreases, the drive signal to the
I/P converter submodule decreases, decreasing the
I/P output pressure. The pneumatic relay decreases
the output A pressure and increases the output B
May 2007
pressure. The stem moves upward until the correct
position is attained. At this point the printed wiring
board assembly stabilizes the I/P drive signal. This
positions the flapper to prevent any further decrease in
nozzle pressure.
Safety Instrumented System
Applications
The principle of operation of the DVC6000 is the same
for safety instrumented system applications as for
process applications. However, when used in a safety
instrumented system application the DVC6000 can be
configured for two output positions. Depending on
relay action (direct or reverse) the DVC6000 can be
configured for full pneumatic output during normal
operation and minimum output during trip condition, or
vice versa.
8-3
DVC6000 SIS
TERMINAL BOX
TERMINAL BOX COVER
HOUSING
PNEUMATIC RELAY GAUGES
COVER
TRAVEL SENSOR
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ASSEMBLY
8
I/P CONVERTER
W8083-1 SIS
MODULE BASE ASSEMBLY
Figure 8-5. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Assembly
8-4
May 2007
Maintenance
9-9
Section 9 Maintenance
Instrument Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
Checking Voltage Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4
Module Base Maintenance
Removing the Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
Replacing the Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6
Submodule Maintenance
I/P Converter
Removing the I/P Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the I/P Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
9-7
Printed Wiring Board (PWB) Assembly
Removing the Printed Wiring Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Printed Wiring Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Printed Wiring Board Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
9-8
9-8
9
Pneumatic Relay
Removing the Pneumatic Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the Pneumatic Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-8
9-9
Gauges, Pipe Plugs or Tire Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-9
Terminal Box
Removing the Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-9
Replacing the Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-10
Travel Sensor
Disassembly
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller (Sliding-Stem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller(Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-10
9-11
9-11
Assembly
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller(Sliding-Stem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller (Rotary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
May 2007
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-1
DVC6000 SIS
The DVC6000 Series digital valve controller enclosure
is rated NEMA 4X and IP66, therefore periodic
cleaning of internal components is not required. If the
DVC6000 is installed in an area where the exterior
surfaces tend to get heavily coated or layered with
industrial or atmospheric contaminants, however, it is
recommended that the vent (key 52) be periodically
inspected to ensure it is fully open. If the vent appears
to be clogged, the vent can be removed, cleaned and
replaced. Lightly brush the exterior of the vent to
remove contaminant and run a mild water/detergent
solution through the vent to ensure it is fully open.
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
can occur from cover failure due to
overpressure. Ensure that the
housing vent opening is open and
free of debris to prevent pressure
buildup under the cover.
WARNING
To avoid static discharge from the
plastic cover, do not rub or clean the
cover with solvents. To do so could
result in an explosion. Clean with a
mild detergent and water only.
9
WARNING
Avoid personal injury or property
damage from sudden release of
process pressure or bursting of parts.
Before performing any maintenance
procedures on the DVC6000 Series
digital valve controller:
Always wear protective clothing,
gloves, and eyewear to prevent
personal injury.
Disconnect any operating lines
providing air pressure, electric power,
or a control signal to the actuator. Be
sure the actuator cannot suddenly
open or close the valve.
Use bypass valves or completely
shut off the process to isolate the
valve from process pressure. Relieve
process pressure from both sides of
the valve.
9-2
Vent the pneumatic actuator
loading pressure and relieve any
actuator spring precompression.
Use lock-out procedures to be sure
that the above measures stay in effect
while you work on the equipment.
Check with your process or safety
engineer for any additional measures
that must be taken to protect against
process media.
CAUTION
When replacing components, use only
components specified by the factory.
Always use proper component
replacement techniques, as presented
in this manual. Improper techniques or
component selection may invalidate
the approvals and the product
specifications, as indicated in table
1-2. It may also impair operations and
the intended function of the device.
Note
If the feedback arm (key 79) or
feedback arm assembly (key 84)
is removed from the digital valve
controller, the travel sensor (key
77) must be recalibrated.
Because of the diagnostic capability of the DVC6000
Series digital valve controllers, predictive maintenance
is available through the use of AMS ValveLink
Software. Using the digital valve controller, valve and
instrument maintenance can be enhanced, thus
avoiding unnecessary maintenance. For information
on using the ValveLink Software, refer to the AMS
ValveLink Software online help.
Instrument Troubleshooting
If communication or output difficulties are experienced
with the instrument, refer to the troubleshooting chart
in table 9-1.
May 2007
Maintenance
Table 9-1. Instrument Troubleshooting
Symptom
1. Analog input reading at
instrument does not match
actual current provided.
Possible Cause
Action
1a. Control mode not Analog.
1a. Check the control mode using the Field Communicator. If
in the Digital or Test mode, the instrument receives its set
point as a digital signal. Control is not based on input current.
Change Control Mode to Analog.
1b. Low control system compliance voltage.
1b. Check system compliance voltage (see Wiring Practices
in the Installation section.
1c. Instrument shutdown due to self test failure.
1c. Check instrument status using the Field Communicator
(see Viewing Instrument Status in the Viewing Device
Information section).
1d. Calibrate the analog input sensor (see Analog Input
Calibration in the Calibration section).
1d. Analog input sensor not calibrated.
1e. Current leakage.
2. Instrument will not
communicate.
1e. Excessive moisture in the terminal box can cause current
leakage. Typically the current will vary randomly if this is the
case. Allow the inside of the terminal box to dry, then retest.
2a. Calculate Voltage Available (see Wiring Practices in the
Installation section). Voltage Available should be greater than
or equal to 11 VDC.
2b. Install a HART filter after reviewing Control System
Compliance Voltage requirements (see Wiring Practices in the
Installation section).
2c. Review maximum cable capacitance limits (see Wiring
Practices in the Installation section).
2a. Insufficient Voltage Available.
2b. Controller output Impedance too low.
2c. Cable capacitance too high.
2d. HART filter improperly adjusted.
2d. Check filter adjustment (see the appropriate HART filter
instruction manual).
2e. Improper field wiring.
2e. Check polarity of wiring and integrity of connections. Make
sure cable shield is grounded only at the control system.
2f. Controller output providing less than 4 mA to loop.
2f. Check control system minimum output setting, which
should not be less than 3.8 mA.
2g. Disconnected loop wiring cable at PWB.
2g. Verify connectors are plugged in correctly.
2h. PWB DIP switch not set properly.
2h. Check for incorrect setting or broken DIP switch on the
back of the PWB. Reset switch or replace PWB, if switch is
broken. See table 9-3 for switch setting information
2j. Use a 4−20 mA current source to apply power to the
instrument. Terminal voltage across the LOOP+ and LOOP−
terminals should be 9 to 10.5 VDC. If the terminal voltage is
not 9 to 10.5 VDC, replace the PWB.
2j. PWB failure.
2k. Polling address incorrect.
2k. Use the Field Communicator to set the polling address
(refer to the Detailed Setup section). From the Utilities menu,
select Configure Communicator and Polling. Select Always
Poll. Set the instrument polling address to 0.
2l. Defective terminal box.
2l. Check continuity from each screw terminal to the
corresponding PWB connector pin. If necessary, replace the
terminal box assembly.
2m. If necessary, repair or replace cable.
2m. Defective Field Communicator or ValveLink
modem cable.
3. Instrument will not
calibrate, has sluggish
performance or oscillates.
2n. ValveLink modem defective or not compatible
with PC.
2n. Replace ValveLink modem.
2p. ValveLink hardlock defective or not programmed.
2p. Replace if defective or return to factory for programming.
3a. Travel sensor seized, will not turn.
3a. Rotate feedback arm to ensure it moves freely. If not,
replace the pot/bushing assy.
3b. Broken travel sensor wire(s).
3b. Inspect wires for broken solder joint at pot or broken wire.
Replace pot/bushing assy.
3c. Travel sensor misadjusted.
3c. Perform Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the Calibration
section.
3d. Open travel sensor.
3d. Check for continuity in electrical travel range. If necessary,
replace pot/bushing assy.
3e. Cables not plugged into PWB correctly.
3e. Inspect connections and correct.
3f. Feedback arm loose on pot.
3f. Perform Travel Sensor Adjust procedure in the Calibration
section.
3g. Feedback arm bent/damaged or bias spring
missing/damaged.
3g. Replace feedback arm and bias spring.
−continued−
May 2007
9-3
9
DVC6000 SIS
Table 9-1. Instrument Troubleshooting (Continued)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
3h. Configuration errors.
3h. Verify configuration:
If necessary, set protection to None.
If Out of Service, place In Service.
Check:
Travel Sensor Motion
Tuning set
Zero power condition
Feedback Connection
Control mode (should be Analog)
Restart control mode (should be Analog)
3j. Restricted pneumatic passages in I/P converter.
3j. Check screen in I/P converter supply port of the module
base. Replace if necessary. If passages in I/P converter
restricted, replace I/P converter.
3k. O-ring(s) between I/P converter ass’y missing or hard 3k. Replace O-ring(s).
and flattened losing seal.
9
3l. I/P converter ass’y damaged/corroded/clogged.
3l. Check for bent flapper, open coil (continuity),
contamination, staining, or dirty air supply. Coil resistance
should be between 1680 - 1860 ohms. Replace I/P assy if
damaged, corroded, clogged, or open coil.
3m. I/P converter ass’y out of spec.
3m. I/P converter ass’y nozzle may have been adjusted. Verify
drive signal (55 to 80% for double-acting; 60 to 85% for
single-acting) with the valve off the stops. Replace I/P
converter ass’y if drive signal is continuously high or low.
3n. Defective module base seal.
3n. Check module base seal for condition and position. If
necessary, replace seal.
3p. Defective relay.
3p. Depress relay beam at adjustment location in shroud, look
for increase in output pressure. Remove relay, inspect relay
seal. Replace relay seal or relay if I/P converter ass’y good
and air passages not blocked. Check relay adjustment.
3q. Defective 67CFR regulator, supply pressure gauge
jumps around.
3q. Replace 67CFR regulator.
4. ValveLink diagnostic tests 4a. Bent or defective pressure sensor.
provide erroneous results.
4b. Pressure sensor O-ring missing.
4a. Replace PWB.
5. Field Communicator does 5a. Battery pack not charged.
not turn on.
5a. Charge battery pack.
Note: Battery pack can be charged while attached to the Field
communicator or separately. The 375 Field Communicator is
fully operable while the battery pack is charging. Do not
attempt to charge the battery pack in a hazardous area.
Checking Voltage Available
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage
caused by fire or explosion may occur
if this test is attempted in an area
which contains a potentially explosive
atmosphere or has been classified as
hazardous.
To check the Voltage Available at the instrument,
perform the following:
9-4
4b. Replace O-ring.
1. Connect the equipment in figure 2-17 to the field
wiring in place of the FIELDVUE instrument.
2. Set the control system to provide maximum output
current.
3. Set the resistance of the 1 kilohm potentiometer
shown in figure 2-17 to zero.
4. Record the current shown on the milliammeter.
5. Adjust the resistance of the 1 kilohm potentiometer
until the voltage read on the voltmeter is 11.0 volts.
6. Record the current shown on the milliammeter.
7. If the current recorded in step 6 is the same as that
recorded in step 4 (± 0.08 mA), the voltage available is
adequate.
8. If the voltage available is inadequate, refer to
Wiring Practices in the Installation section.
May 2007
Maintenance
Table 9-2. Tools Required
Tool
Size
Component
5 mm
1.5 mm
2.5 mm
5 mm
6 mm
1/2-inch
9/64-inch
7/16-inch
3/16-inch
Relay, printed wiring board
assembly, and cover screws
Terminal box screw
Terminal box cover screw
I/P converter screws
Travel sensor screws
Module base screws
Connector Arm screw (DVC6010)
Feedback arm screw
DVC6010 mounting bolts
DVC6020 mounting bolts
Phillips Screwdriver
Hex key
Hex key
Hex key
Hex key
Hex key
Open-end wrench
Hex key
Open-end wrench
Hex key
Module Base Maintenance
The digital valve controller contains a module base
consisting of the I/P converter, printed wiring board
assembly, and pneumatic relay. The module base may
be easily replaced in the field without disconnecting
field wiring or tubing.
Tools Required
TERMINAL BOX
MODULE BASE
ASSEMBLY
HOUSING
W8073
CABLE TO
TERMINAL BOX
CABLE TO
TRAVEL SENSOR
PRINTED WIRING
BOARD ASSEMBLY
Figure 9-1. Printed Wiring Board Cable Connections
and 2-2). Remove this shield and keep for reuse on
the replacement module. The replacement module will
not have this protective shield.
Table 9-2 lists the tools required for maintaining the
DVC6000 Series digital valve controller.
2. Unscrew the four captive screws in the cover
(key 43) and remove the cover from the module
base (key 2).
Removing the Module Base
3. Using a 6 mm hex socket wrench, loosen the
three-socket head screws (key 38). These screws
are captive in the module base by retaining rings
(key 154).
WARNING
9
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
To remove the module base perform the following
steps. Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key
number locations.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or equipment
damage from bursting of parts, turn
off the supply pressure to the digital
valve controller and bleed off any
excess supply pressure before
attempting to remove the module
base assembly from the housing.
1. For sliding-stem applications only, a protective
shield for the feedback linkage is attached to the side
of the module base assembly (see figures 2-1
May 2007
Note
The module base is linked to the
housing by two cable assemblies.
Disconnect these cable
assemblies after you pull the
module base out of the housing.
4. Pull the module base straight out of the housing
(key 1). Once clear of the housing, swing the module
base to the side of the housing to gain access to the
cable assemblies.
5. The digital valve controller has two cable
assemblies, shown in figure 9-1, which connect the
module base, via the printed wiring board assembly, to
the travel sensor and the terminal box. Disconnect
these cable assemblies from the printed wiring board
assembly on the back of the module base.
9-5
DVC6000 SIS
CAUTION
To avoid affecting performance of the
instrument, take care not to damage
the module base seal or guide surface.
Do not bump or damage the bare
connector pins on the PWB assembly.
Damaging either the module base or
guide surface may result in material
damage, which could compromise the
instruments ability to maintain a
pressure seal.
6. Attach the cover (key 43) to the module base
assembly.
7. For sliding-stem applications only, install the
protective shield onto the side of the replacement
module base assembly (see figures 2-1 and 2-2).
Submodule Maintenance
The digital valve controller’s module base contains the
following submodules: I/P converter, PWB assembly,
and pneumatic relay. If problems occur, these
submodules may be removed from the module base
and replaced with new submodules. After replacing a
submodule, the module base may be put back into
service.
Replacing the Module Base
To replace the module base perform the following
steps. Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key
number locations.
Note
Inspect the guide surface on the
module and the corresponding seating
area in the housing before installing
the module base assembly. To avoid
affecting performance of the
instrument these surfaces must be
free of dust, dirt, scratches, and
contamination.
9
Ensure the module base seal is in
good condition. Do not reuse a
damaged or worn seal.
1. Ensure the module base seal (key 237) is properly
installed in the housing (key 1). Ensure the O-ring
(key 12) is in place on the module base assembly.
2. Connect the terminal box connector to the PWB
assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
required.
3. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
required.
4. Insert the module base (key 2) into the housing
(key 1).
5. Install three socket head screws (key 38) in the
module base into the housing. If not already installed,
press three retaining rings (key 154) into the module
base. Evenly tighten the screws in a crisscross pattern
to a final torque of 16 Nm (138 lbfin).
9-6
CAUTION
Exercise care when performing
maintenance on the module base.
Reinstall the cover to protect the I/P
converter and gauges when servicing
other submodules.
In order to maintain accuracy
specifications, do not strike or drop
the I/P converter during submodule
maintenance.
I/P Converter
WARNING
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key number
locations. The I/P converter (key 41) is located on the
front of the module base.
Note
After I/P converter submodule
replacement, calibrate the digital valve
controller to maintain accuracy
specifications.
Replacing the I/P Filter
A screen in the supply port beneath the I/P converter
serves as a secondary filter for the supply medium. To
replace this filter, perform the following procedure:
May 2007
Maintenance
SHROUD
(KEY 169)
SOCKET-HEAD
SCREWS (4)
(KEY 23)
I/P CONVERTER
(KEY 41)
W8071
BOOTS
(KEY 210)
O-RING LOCATED
IN I/P CONVERTER
OUTPUT PORT
SCREEN (FILTER)
LOCATED IN I/P
CONVERTER
SUPPLY PORT
W8072-1
Figure 9-2. I/P Filter Location
Figure 9-3. I/P Converter
2. Ensure the two boots (key 210) shown in figure 9-3
are properly installed on the electrical leads.
2. Remove the screen (key 231) from the supply port.
3. Install the I/P converter (key 41) straight into the
module base (key 2), taking care that the two electrical
leads feed into the guides in the module base. These
guides route the leads to the printed wiring board
assembly submodule.
3. Install a new screen in the supply port as shown in
figure 9-2.
4. Install the shroud (key 169) over the I/P converter
(key 41).
4. Inspect the O-ring (key 39) in the I/P output port. if
necessary, replace it.
5. Install the four socket-head screws (key 23) and
evenly tighten them in a crisscross pattern to a final
torque of 1.6 Nm (14 lbfin).
1. Remove the I/P converter (key 41) and shroud
(key 169) as described in the Removing the I/P
Converter procedure.
5. Reinstall the I/P converter (key 41) and shroud
(key 169) as described in the Replacing the I/P
Converter procedure.
Removing the I/P Converter
1. Remove the front cover (key 43), if not already
removed.
2. Refer to figure 9-3. Using a 2.5 mm hex socket
wrench, remove the four socket-head screws (key 23)
that attach the shroud (key 169) and I/P converter
(key 41) to the module base (key 2).
3. Remove the shroud (key 169); then pull the I/P
converter (key 41) straight out of the module base
(key 2). Be careful not to damage the two electrical
leads that come out of the base of the I/P converter.
4. Ensure that the O-ring (key 39) and screen
(key 231) stay in the module base and do not come
out with the I/P converter (key 41).
Replacing the I/P Converter
1. Refer to figure 9-2. Inspect the condition of the
O-ring (key 39) and screen (key 231) in the module
base (key 2). Replace them, if necessary. Apply
silicone lubricant to the O-rings.
May 2007
6. After replacing the I/P converter, calibrate travel or
perform touch-up calibration to maintain accuracy
specifications.
PWB (Printed Wiring Board) Assembly
Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key number
locations. The PWB assembly (key 50) is located on
the back of the module base assembly (key 2).
Note
If the PWB assembly submodule is
replaced, calibrate and configure the
digital valve controller to maintain
accuracy specifications.
Removing the Printed Wiring Board
Assembly
1. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
9-7
9
DVC6000 SIS
4. Install and tighten three screws (key 33) to a torque
of 1 Nm (10.1 lbfin).
BACK OF PWB ASSEMBLY
SUB-MODULE
5. Set the DIP switch on the PWB assembly
according to table 9-3.
DIP SWITCH
Note
UP
For the digital valve controller to
operate with a 4 to 20 mA control
signal, the DIP switch must be in the
point-to-point loop position, as shown
in table 9-3.
DOWN
TERMINAL BOX
CONNECTOR
TRAVEL SENSOR
CONNECTOR
PINS REMOVED FOR CONNECTOR KEYING.
Figure 9-4. DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller DIP Switch
Location
Table 9-3. DIP Switch Configuration(1)
Operational Mode
Multidrop Loop
9
Point-to-Point Loop
Switch Position
For the digital valve controller to
operate with a 24 VDC voltage control
signal, the DIP switch must be in the
multidrop loop position, as shown in
table 9-3.
6. Reassemble the module base to the housing by
performing the Replacing the Module Base procedure.
UP
7. Setup and calibrate the digital valve controller.
DOWN
Pneumatic Relay
1. Refer to figure 9-4 for switch location.
WARNING
2. Remove three screws (key 33).
3. Lift the PWB assembly (key 50) straight out of the
module base (key 2).
4. Ensure that the O-rings (key 40) remain in the
pressure sensor bosses on the module base assembly
(key 2) after the PWB assembly (key 50) has been
removed.
Replacing the PWB Assembly and Setting
the DIP Switch
1. Apply silicone lubricant to the pressure sensor
O-rings (key 40) and install them on the pressure
sensor bosses in the module base assembly.
2. Properly orient the PWB assembly (key 50) as you
install it into the module base. The two electrical leads
from the I/P converter (key 41) must guide into their
receptacles in the PWB assembly and the pressure
sensor bosses on the module base must fit into their
receptacles in the PWB assembly.
3. Push the PWB assembly (key 50) into its cavity in
the module base.
9-8
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key number
locations. The pneumatic relay (key 24) is located on
the front of the module base.
Note
After relay submodule replacement,
calibrate the digital valve controller to
maintain accuracy specifications.
Removing the Pneumatic Relay
1. Loosen the four screws that attach the relay
(key 24) to the module base. These screws are
captive in the relay.
2. Remove the relay.
May 2007
Maintenance
Perform the following procedure to replace the
gauges, tire valves, or pipe plugs. Refer to figures
10-1 through 10-4 for key number locations.
1. Remove the front cover (key 43).
2. Remove the gauge, pipe plug, or tire valve as
follows:
For gauges (key 47), the flats are on the gauge case.
Use a wrench on the flats of the gauge to remove the
gauge from the module base. For double-acting
instruments, to remove the supply gauge remove one
of the output gauges.
RELAY SEAL
W8074
Figure 9-5. Pneumatic Relay Assembly
Replacing the Pneumatic Relay
1. Visually inspect the holes in the module base to
ensure they are clean and free of obstructions. If
cleaning is necessary, do not enlarge the holes.
2. Apply silicone lubricant to the relay seal and
position it in the grooves on the bottom of the relay as
shown in figure 9-5. Press small seal retaining tabs
into retaining slots to hold relay seal in place.
3. Position the relay (with shroud) on the module
base. Tighten the four screws, in a crisscross pattern,
to a final torque of 2 Nm (20.7 lbfin).
4. Using the Field Communicator, verify that the value
for Relay Type parameter matches the relay type
installed.
5. After replacing the relay and verifying the relay
type, calibrate travel to maintain accuracy
specifications
Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Valves
WARNING
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Depending on the options ordered, the DVC6000
Series digital valve controller will be equipped with
either gauges (key 47), pipe plugs (key 66), or tire
valves (key 67). Single-acting direct instruments will
also have a screen (key 236, figure 10-4). These are
located on the top of the module base next to the
relay.
May 2007
For pipe plugs (key 66) and tire valves (key 67),
use a wrench to remove these from the module base.
3. Apply sealant (key 64) to the threads of the
replacement gauges, pipe plugs, or tire valves.
4. Using a wrench, screw the gauges, pipe plugs, or
tire valves into the module base.
Terminal Box
Refer to figures 10-1 through 10-4 for key number
locations.
The terminal box is located on the housing and
contains the terminal strip assembly for field wiring
connections.
Removing the Terminal Box
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or property
damage caused by fire or explosion,
remove power to the instrument
before removing the terminal box
cover in an area which contains a
potentially explosive atmosphere or
has been classified as hazardous.
1. Loosen the set screw (key 58) in the cap (key 4) so
that the cap can be unscrewed from the terminal box.
2. After removing the cap (key 4), note the location of
field wiring connections and disconnect the field wiring
from the terminal box.
3. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
4. Remove the screw (key 72). Pull the terminal box
assembly straight out of the housing.
9-9
9
DVC6000 SIS
5. Remove two wire retainers (key 44), internal and
external to the terminal box.
Travel Sensor
WARNING
Replacing the Terminal Box
Note
Inspect all O-rings for wear and
replace as necessary.
1. Install two wire retainers (key 44), internal and
external to the terminal box.
2. Apply silicone lubricant to the O-ring (key 35) and
install the O-ring over the stem of the terminal box.
9
3. Insert the terminal box assembly stem into the
housing until it bottoms out. Position the terminal box
assembly so that the hole for the screw (key 72) in the
terminal box aligns with the threaded hole in the
housing. Install the screw (key 72).
4. Connect the terminal box connector to the PWB
assembly (key 50). Orientation of the connector is
required.
5. Reassemble the module base to the housing by
performing the Replacing the Module Base procedure.
6. Reconnect the field wiring as noted in step 2 in the
Removing the Terminal Box procedure.
7. Apply silicone lubricant to the O-ring (key 36) and
install the O-ring over the 2-5/8 inch threads of the
terminal box. Use of a tool is recommended to prevent
cutting the O-ring while installing it over the threads.
Refer to the Maintenance WARNING at
the beginning of this section.
Replacing the travel sensor requires removing the
digital valve controller from the actuator.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or property
damage caused by fire or explosion,
remove power to the instrument
before removing the potentiometer in
an area which contains a potentially
explosive atmosphere or has been
classified as hazardous.
Disassembly
Note
If the feedback arm (key 79) or
feedback arm assembly (key 84) is
removed from the digital valve
controller, the travel sensor (key 77)
must be recalibrated.
DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller
Refer to figure 10-1 for key number locations.
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.
8. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the 2-5/8 inch threads
on the terminal box to prevent seizing or galling when
the cap is installed.
2. Disconnect the adjustment arm from the connector
arm and the feedback arm (see figures 2-1 and 2-2).
9. Screw the cap (key 4) onto the terminal box.
4. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the
feedback arm (key 79) to the travel sensor shaft.
10. Install a set screw (key 58) into the cap (key 4).
Loosen the cap (not more than 1 turn) to align the set
screw over one of the recesses in the terminal box.
Tighten the set screw (key 58).
11. Apply sealant (key 64) to the conduit entrance
plug (key 62) and install it into the unused conduit
entry of the terminal box.
9-10
3. Remove the instrument from the actuator.
5. Remove the feedback arm (key 79) from the travel
sensor shaft.
6. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
7. Remove the screw (key 72) that fastens the travel
sensor assembly to the housing.
May 2007
Maintenance
8. Pull the travel sensor assembly (key 223) straight
out of the housing.
Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller
DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller
1. Insert the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into the
housing (key 1). Secure the travel sensor assembly
with screw (key 72).
Refer to figure 10-2 for key number locations.
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.
2. Remove the digital valve controller from the
actuator.
3. Disconnect the bias spring (key 82) from the
feedback arm assembly (key 84) and the arm
assembly (key 91). Remove the mounting bracket
(key 74) from the back of the digital controller.
4. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the arm
assembly to the travel sensor shaft.
5. Remove the arm assembly (key 91) from the travel
sensor assembly (key 77) shaft.
6. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
7. Remove the screw (key 72) that fastens the travel
sensor assembly to the housing.
8. Pull the travel sensor assembly (key 223) straight
out of the housing.
Type DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller
Refer to figure 10-3 for key number locations.
1. Remove piping and fittings from the instrument.
2. Remove the digital valve controller from the
actuator. Loosen the screw (key 80) that secures the
feedback arm (key 79) to the travel sensor shaft.
Remove the feedback arm from the travel sensor
shaft.
Refer to figure 10-1 for key number locations.
2. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB as
described in the Replacing the Module Base
procedure.
3. Loosely assemble the bias spring (key 78), screw
(key 80), plain washer (key 163), and nut (key 81) to
the feedback arm (key 79), if not already installed.
4. Attach the feedback arm (key 79) to the travel
sensor shaft.
Two methods are available for adjusting the travel
sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the
potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Communicator, you can use the procedure in the
Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform
steps 5 through 11. To use the Field Communicator,
skip to step 12.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter
5. Align the feedback arm (key 79) to the housing
(key 1) by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through
the hole marked “A” on the feedback arm. Fully
engage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in the
side of the housing. Position the feedback arm so that
the surface is flush with the end of the travel sensor
shaft.
6. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range
of 3000 ohms to pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
connector. Refer to figure 9-6 for pin location.
7. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain a measured
resistance of 1950 to 2050 ohms.
3. Separate the module base from the housing by
performing the Removing the Module Base procedure.
4. From within the housing, unscrew the travel sensor
assembly (key 223) from the housing.
In the next step, be sure the feedback
arm surface remains flush with the end
of the travel sensor shaft.
Assembly
Note
If the feedback arm (key 79) or
feedback arm assembly (key 84) is
removed from the digital valve
controller, the travel sensor (key 77)
must be recalibrated.
May 2007
Note
8. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains
within the range listed in step 7. Paint the screw to
discourage tampering with the connection.
9. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor
connector.
10. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in Replacing the Module Base.
9-11
9
DVC6000 SIS
PIN 2
PIN 3
1
KEYED
3
1
9
CW
NOTE:
1 THE POTENTIOMETER RESISTANCE BETWEEN PINS 2 AND 3 CAN BE
MEASURED AT THE CONNECTOR. INSERT TWO SHORT LENGTHS OF
22 AWG WIRE INTO THE PIN 2 AND 3 RECEPTACLES IN THE CONNECTOR.
CLIP ON LEADS FROM A DVM (DIGITAL VOLTMETER) TO MEASURE THE
RESISTANCE.
A6481/IL
Figure 9-6. Potentiometer Resistance Measurement
11. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the
digital valve controller on the actuator.
2. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB as
described in Replacing the Module Base.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field
Communicator
3. Loosely assemble the screw (key 80), plain washer
(key 163), and nut (key 81) to the arm assembly
(key 91), if not already installed.
The next two steps do not apply if you used a
multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor
using the Field Communicator.
12. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in Replacing the Module Base.
13. Perform the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust
procedure in the Calibration section.
Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller
Refer to figure 10-2 for key number locations.
1. Insert the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into the
housing. Secure the travel sensor assembly with
screw (key 72).
9-12
4. Attach the arm assembly (key 91) to the travel
sensor assembly (key 223) shaft.
Two methods are available for adjusting the travel
sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the
potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Communicator, you can use the procedure in the
Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform
steps 5 through 15. To use the Field Communicator,
skip to step 16.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter
5. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of
7000 ohms to pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
connector. Refer to figure 9-6 for pin location.
May 2007
Maintenance
6. Hold the arm assembly (key 91) in a fixed position
so that the arm is parallel to the housing back plane
and pointing toward the terminal box. Position the arm
assembly so that the outer surface is flush with the
end of the travel sensor shaft.
BIAS SPRING
(KEY 82)
FEEDBACK
ARM
ASSEMBLY
(KEY 84)
7. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain a measured
resistance of 6250 to 6350 ohms.
Note
ARM ASSEMBLY
(KEY 91)
In the next step, be sure the arm
assembly outer surface remains flush
with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
8. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains
within the range listed in step 7. Paint the screw to
discourage tampering with the connection.
NOTE:
INSTALL BIAS SPRING WITH SMALLER DIAMETER HOOK
CONNECTED TO ARM ASSEMBLY (KEY 91) AND WITH BOTH HOOK
OPENINGS TOWARD CENTER OF BRACKET.
Figure 9-7. Type DVC6020 digital Valve Controller, bias Spring
(key 82) Installation
9. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor
connector.
10. Apply lubricant (key 64 or equivalent) to the pin
portion of the arm assembly (key 91).
11. Position the mounting bracket over the back of the
digital valve controller. Push the feedback arm
assembly (key 84) toward the housing and engage the
pin of the arm assembly into the slot in the feedback
arm.
12. Install the mounting bracket (key 74).
13. Install the bias spring (key 82) as shown in
figure 9-7.
14. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in Replacing the Module Base.
15. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the
digital valve controller on the actuator.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field
Communicator
The next two steps do not apply if you used a
multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor
using the Field Communicator.
16. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in Replacing the Module Base.
17. Perform the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust
procedure in the Calibration section.
May 2007
Type DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller
Refer to figure 10-3 for key number locations.
1. Apply lubricant (key 63) to the travel sensor
assembly threads.
2. Screw the travel sensor assembly (key 223) into
the housing until it is tight.
3. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB as
described in the Replacing the Module Base
procedure.
4. Loosely assemble the bias spring (key 78), screw
(key 80), plain washer (key 163), and nut (key 81) to
the feedback arm (key 79), if not already installed.
5. Attach the feedback arm (key 79) to the travel
sensor shaft.
Two methods are available for adjusting the travel
sensor. You can use a multimeter to measure the
potentiometer resistance, or if you have a Field
Communicator, you can use the procedure in the
Calibration section. To use the multimeter, perform
steps 6 through 12. To use the Field Communicator,
skip to step 13.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with a Multimeter
6. Align the feedback arm (key 79) to the housing
(key 1) by inserting the alignment pin (key 46) through
the hole marked “A” on the feedback arm. Fully
engage the alignment pin into the tapped hole in the
housing. Position the feedback arm so that the outer
surface is flush with the end of the travel sensor shaft.
9-13
9
DVC6000 SIS
7. Connect a multimeter set to a resistance range of
3000 ohms to pins 2 and 3 of the travel sensor
connector. Refer to figure 9-6 for pin location.
8. Adjust the travel sensor shaft to obtain a measured
resistance of 1950 to 2050 ohms.
Note
In the next step, be sure the feedback
arm outer surface remains flush with
the end of the travel sensor shaft.
9. While observing the resistance, tighten the screw
(key 80) to secure the feedback arm to the travel
sensor shaft. Be sure the resistance reading remains
within the range listed in step 7. Paint the screw to
discourage tampering with the connection.
10. Disconnect the multimeter from the travel sensor
connector.
11. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in Replacing the Module Base.
12. Travel sensor replacement is complete. Install the
digital valve controller on the actuator as described in
the Installation section.
Travel Sensor Adjustment with the Field
Communicator
The next two steps do not apply if you used a
multimeter to adjust the travel sensor. Perform these
steps only if you elected to adjust the travel sensor
using the Field Communicator.
13. Connect the travel sensor connector to the PWB
as described in Replacing the Module Base.
14. Perform the appropriate Travel Sensor Adjust
procedure in the Calibration section.
9
9-14
May 2007
Parts
10-10
Section 10 Parts
Parts Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
Parts Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3
Common Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3
Module Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
I/P Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
Terminal Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
PWB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
Pressure Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire Valve Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
Feedback / Remote Travel Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5
LC340 Line Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5
10
May 2007
10-1
DVC6000 SIS
Parts Ordering
Note
Whenever corresponding with your Emerson Process
Management sales office about this equipment,
always mention the controller serial number. When
ordering replacement parts, refer to the 11-character
part number of each required part as found in the
following parts list. Parts which do not show part
numbers are not orderable.
All part numbers are for both
aluminum and stainless steel
constructions, unless otherwise
indicated.
WARNING
Use only genuine Fisher replacement
parts. Components that are not
supplied by Emerson Process
Management should not, under any
circumstances, be used in any Fisher
instrument. Use of components not
supplied by Emerson Process
Management will void your warranty,
might adversely affect the
performance of the valve, and could
give rise to personal injury and
property damage.
10
Note
The stainless steel option is available
for Safety Instrumented Systems,
however, TÜV approval is still in
progress. Contact your Emerson
Process Management sales office for
additional information.
Parts Kits
Conversion kit 3 listed below provides the parts
required to convert a DVC6010 to a DVC6020.
Conversion kit 4 provides the parts required to convert
a DVC6020 to a DVC6010.
Kit
1*
2*
3
Note
Neither Emerson, Emerson Process
Management, nor any of their affiliated
entities assumes responsibility for the
selection, use, and maintenance of any
product. Responsibility for the selection,
use, and maintenance of any product
remains with the purchaser and
end-user.
Description
Elastomer Spare Parts Kit (kit contains parts to
service one digital valve controller)
Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit (kit contains parts
to service one digital valve controller)
Conversion Kit (DVC6010 to DVC6020 )
Also see note below
Part Number
19B5402X012
19B5403X012
19B5405X012
Note
When converting a DVC6010 to a DVC6020 for
pipe-away construction, also order pipe-away bracket
kit, item 6.
4
5
6
7*
8
9*
Conversion Kit (DVC6020 to DVC6010)
Alignment Pin Kit
[kit contains 15 alignment pins (key 46)]
Pipe-Away Bracket Kit (DVC6020) [kit contains
mounting bracket (key 74) and O-ring (key 75)]
Seal Screen Kit
[kit contains 25 seal screens (key 231)
and 25 O-rings (key 39)]
Terminal Box Kit, aluminum
I/P Converter Kit
14B5072X112
14B5072X092
19B5404X012
14B5072X182
19B5401X012
38B6041X092
*Recommended spare
10-2
May 2007
Parts
Kit
10
11
12*
Description
Vent with extension
For a DVC6020 replacing a DVC5020
on an existing mounting
Adjustment Arm Kit
(includes washer, nut and adjustment arm
Part Number
19B3407X012
14B5072X132
Spare Module Base Assembly Kit, aluminum
[kit contains module base (key 2); drive screws, qty. 2,
(key 11); shield/label (key 19); hex socket cap screw, qty. 3,
(key 38); self tapping screw, qty. 2 (key 49); pipe plug, qty. 3
(key 61); retaining ring, qty. 3 (key 154); screen (key 236);
and flame arrestors, qty. 3 (key 243)]
GE18654X012
14*
Spare Housing Assembly Kit, aluminum
[kit contains housing (key 1); drive screw, qty. 2 (key 11);
shield (key 20); and screen (key 271)]
DVC6010/DVC6020
GE18652X012
DVC6030
GE18653X012
DVC6020 Cam Adjustment Tool
GE12742X012
Safety Instrumented System Kits
16
SIS Preventative Maintenance Kits
DVC6010 and DVC6020
DVC6030
19B4032X012
19B4031X012
Severe Service Linkage Kits
Note
All metallic parts (except coil springs) in the corrosion
kit and parts that experience rubbing or wear in the
wear kit are coated with a proprietary tungsten carbon
coating.
22
Parts which do not show part numbers are not
orderable as individual parts. In most cases, they are
available in one of the parts kits listed under Parts
Kits.
PTFE Sleeve Kit
[For pot bushing assembly (kit includes 10 sleeves and
Lubricant)]
DVC6010 and DVC6020
GE08726X012
DVC6030
GE08727X012
13*
15
Parts List
Corrosion Kit
DVC6010 0.75−2 Inch travel
DVC6010 2−4 Inch travel
DVC6020 short arm
DVC6020 long arm
DVC6030 rotary
DVC6030 linear
Wear Kit
DVC6010 0.75−2 Inch travel
DVC6010 2−4 Inch travel
DVC6020 short arm
DVC6020 long arm
DVC6030 rotary
DVC6030 linear
GE22667X012
GE22668X012
GE22670X012
GE22671X012
GE22672X012
GE22673X012
GE22674X012
GE22675X012
GE22676X012
GE22677X012
GE22678X012
GE22679X012
Note
Parts with footnote numbers shown
are available in parts kits. Also see
footnote information at the bottom of
the page.
Key
Description
Part Number
Housing
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030 (see figures 10-1,
10-2, and 10-3)
1
11
20
52
74
75*
245
271
Housing(14)
Drive Screw(14) (2 req’d)
Shield(14)
Vent, plastic(2) DVC6010 and DVC6030 only
Mounting Bracket
DVC6020 Std(3) or pipe-away(6)
O-Ring(6), DVC6020 only
Pipe Plug, pl stl(6), DVC6020 Vent-away only
Screen(14)
10
Common Parts
(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)
16*
23
29
33
38
43*
48
49
63
64
65
154
237
O-ring(1,16) (3 req’d)
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2) (4 req’d)
Warning label, for use only with LCIE hazardous area
classifications
Mach Screw, pan hd, SST(2) (3 req’d)
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2,13) (3 req’d)
Cover Assembly (includes cover screws)
38B9580X022
Nameplate
Screw, self tapping (2 req’d)(13)
Lithium grease (not furnished with the instrument)
Anti-seize compound (not furnished with the instrument)
Lubricant, silicone sealant (not furnished with the instrument)
Retaining Ring(2) (3 req’d)
Module Base Seal(1,16)
*Recommended spare
2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
3. Available in the DVC6010 to DVC6020 Conversion Kit
6. Available in the Pipe-Away Bracket Kit
14. Available in the Spare Housing Assembly Kit
May 2007
10-3
DVC6000 SIS
Key
Description
Part Number
Module Base
(see figures 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, and 10-4)
2
11
12
19
61
236
243
Module Base(13)
Drive Screw(13) (2 req’d)
O-ring(1,16)
Label, Shield Assembly(13)
Pipe Plug, hex socket(13) (3 req’d)
Screen, for single-acting direct units only(13)
Flame Arrestor Assy(13) (3 req’d)
Note
O-ring (1,7,9,16)
I/P Converter(9,16)
Shroud(9,16)
Boot, nitrile(1,9,16) (2 req’d) (also see figure 9-3)
Seal Screen(1,7,9,16)
Contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office for PWB Assembly FS numbers.
Relay
50*
(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)
Relay Assembly(16), (includes shroud, relay seal, mounting
screws)
Low Bleed, nitrile
Relay A, double-acting
38B5786X072
Note
10
Terminal Box
47*
38B5786X112
38B5786X152
66
(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)
4
34*
36*
44
Terminal Box Cap
O-ring(1,8,16)
O-ring(1,8,16)
Wire Retainer, pl stl(2) (6 req’d) (not shown)
PWB Assembly
Pressure Gauges, Pipe Plugs, or Tire
Valve Assemblies (see figure 10-4)
Relay B and C are not TÜV approved.
Relay B, single-acting reverse
Relay C, single-acting direct
Part Number
DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030
(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)
(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)
24*
Description
Set Screw, hex socket, SST(2)
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2)
Terminal Box Assembly(8)
SIS Label
TÜV Approval Label
PWB Assembly
I/P Converter Assembly
39*
41
169
210*
231*
Key
58
72
164
246
247
67
Pressure Gauge, nickel-plated brass case, brass connection
Double-acting (3 req’d); Single-acting (2 req’d)
PSI/MPA Gauge Scale
To 60 PSI, 0.4 MPa
18B7713X042
To 160 PSI, 1.1 MPa
18B7713X022
PSI/bar Gauge Scale
To 60 PSI, 4 bar
18B7713X032
To 160 PSI, 11 bar
18B7713X012
Pipe Plug, hex hd
For double-acting and single acting direct w/gauges
(none req’d)
For single-acting reverse w/gauges (1 req’d)
For all units w/o gauges (3 req’d)
Tire Valve Assembly (3 req’d)
*Recommended spare
1. Available in the Elastomer Spare Parts Kit
2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
7. Available in the Seal Screen Kit
8. Available in the Terminal Box Kit
9. Available in the I/P Converter Kit
13. Available in the Spare Module Base Assembly Kit
16. Available in the SIS Preventative Maintenance Kit
10-4
May 2007
Parts
Key
Description
Part Number
(see figures 10-1, 10-2, and 10-3)
64
65
72
78
79
80
81
104
107
---
163
223*
Description
Part Number
DVC6020 (see figure 10-2)
Feedback Parts
Common Feedback Parts
46
Key
Alignment Pin(5)
for Type DVC6010 and DVC6030
Anti-seize compound (not furnished with the instrument)
Lubricant, silicone sealant (not furnished with the instrument)
Cap Screw, hex socket(2) (2 req’d)
for Type DVC6010 and DVC6020
Bias Spring, SST(2)
for Type DVC6010 and DVC6030
Feedback Arm
for Type DVC6010 and DVC6030
Cap Screw, hex socket, SST(2)
Square Nut, SST(2)
Cap Screw, hex hd (4 req’d)
Aluminum Construction
DVC6010 only
Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
Mounting parts for 1250 and 1250R actuators are
included in the mounting kit for these actuators.
Stainless Steel Construction
DVC6010 (oversized) (4 req’d)
Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
74
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
Mounting Bracket
Bias Spring, SST(3)
Bearing Flange, PTFE-based(3) (2 req’d)
Feedback Arm Assy, SST(3)
E-ring, pl stl(3) (2 req’d)
Plain Washer, pl stl(3) (2 req’d)
Follower Post, SST(3)
Roller, SST/PTFE(3)
Spring Lock Washer, pl stl(3)
Hex Nut, pl stl(3)
Arm Assy, SST
Cap Screw, hex socket(3) (4 req’d)
Torsion Spring, Feedback Arm(3)
Line Conditioner
LC340 Line conditioner
39B5416X012
Mounting Bracket(4), DVC6010 only
Not for mounting on 1250 and 1250R actuators.
Mounting parts for 1250 and 1250R actuators are
included in the mounting kit for these actuators.
Feedback Linkage Shield, see figures 2-1 and 2-2
Up to 50.4 mm (2-inch) travel
All sliding-stem actuators except 585C size 60
50.4 mm (2-inch) to 104mm (4-inch) travel
All sliding-stem actuators except 585C size 60
Type 585C size 60, 19 mm (0.75 inch) to 104mm (4-inch) travel
Plain Washer, SST(2)
Potentiometer/Bushing Assy(16)
Standard Elastomers
DVC6010, DVC6020
DVC6030
10
18B9576X012
17B4030X032
*Recommended spare
2. Available in the Small Hardware Spare Parts Kit
3. Available in the DVC6010 to DVC6020 Conversion Kit
4. Available in the DVC6020 to DVC6010 Conversion Kit
5. Available in the Alignment Pin Kit
16. Available in the SIS Preventative Maintenance Kit
May 2007
10-5
DVC6000 SIS
11
20
11
247
19
A
246
OUTPUT A
64
A
SECTION A-A
61
49
10
OUTPUT B
271
SUPPLY
243
E
E
1
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
SECTION E-E
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTES:
SEE FIGURE 10-4 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS
1
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O-RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
48B7710 K SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
Figure 10-1. Type DVC6010 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
10-6
May 2007
Parts
A
246
B
B
H
C
C
E
D
D
E
H
SECTION A-A
A
10
SECTION H-H
SECTION B-B
247
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
1. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O-RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
SECTION E-E
48B9596-K/IL SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
Figure 10-2. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
May 2007
10-7
DVC6000 SIS
1
61
64
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTES:
1
SEE FIGURE 10-4 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O-RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
48B9596-K SHT 3 / DOC
Figure 10-2. Type DVC6020 Digital Valve Controller Assembly (continued)
10
10-8
May 2007
Parts
11
243
20
SECTION B-B
19
247
11
OUTPUT A
271
SUPPLY
64
B
B
A
246
D
61
49
D
OUTPUT B
SECTION A-A
10
A
1
C
C
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
APPLY LUB, SEALANT, THREAD LOCK
NOTES:
SEE FIGURE 10-4 FOR GAUGE CONFIGURATIONS
1
2. APPLY LUBRICANT KEY 65 TO ALL O-RINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
48B9597-K SHT 1 & 2 / DOC
Figure 10-3. Type DVC6030 Digital Valve Controller Assembly
May 2007
10-9
DVC6000 SIS
2
1
DOUBLE-ACTING
SINGLE-ACTING DIRECT
SINGLE-ACTING REVERSE
APPLY LUB, SEALANT
NOTE:
1 FOR SINGLE-ACTING DIRECT, OUTPUT B IS PLUGGED.
2 FOR SINGLE-ACTING REVERSE, OUTPUT A IS PLUGGED.
48B7710-G SHT 2 / DOC
Figure 10-4. Typical DVC6000 Series Digital Valve Controller Gauge Configuration
10
10-10
May 2007
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
11-11
Section 11 Loop Schematics/Nameplates
CSA Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
CSA Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
FM Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3
FM Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3
ATEX Nameplate; Intrinsic Safety, Dust-Tight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4
ATEX Nameplate; Flameproof, Dust-Tight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4
ATEX Nameplate; Type n, Dust-Tight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4
IECEx Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5
NEPSI Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5
11
May 2007
11-1
DVC6000 SIS
This section includes loop schematics required for
wiring of intrinsically safe installations. It also contains
the approvals nameplates. If you have any questions,
contact your Emerson Process Management sales
office.
29B3428-B / DOC
Figure 11-1. CSA Schematic for Type DVC6000 and Type DVC6000S
11
TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DVC6030S
Figure 11-2. CSA Nameplate
11-2
May 2007
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
29B3427-A / DOC
Figure 11-3. FM Schematic for Type DVC6000 and Type DVC6000S
11
TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DVC6030S
Figure 11-4. FM Nameplates
May 2007
11-3
DVC6000 SIS
TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DVC6030S
Figure 11-5. ATEX Nameplate; Intrinsic Safety, Dust-Tight
TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DVC6030S
Figure 11-6. ATEX Nameplate; Flameproof, Dust-Tight
11
TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DVC6030S
Figure 11-7. ATEX Nameplate; Type n, Dust-Tight
11-4
May 2007
Loop Schematics/Nameplates
TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030, DVC6010S, DVC6020S, DVC6030S
Figure 11-8. IECEx Nameplate; Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof
TYPE DVC6010, DVC6020, DVC6030
Figure 11-9. NEPSI Nameplate; Intrinsic Safety, Dust; Flameproof, Dust
11
May 2007
11-5
DVC6000 SIS
11
11-6
May 2007
Glossary
L-L-
Glossary
Alert Point
Bench Set
Algorithm
Byte
An adjustable value that, when exceeded,
activates an alert.
A set of logical steps to solve a problem or
accomplish a task. A computer program contains
one or more algorithms.
Alphanumeric
Consisting of letters and numbers.
Analog Input Units
Units in which the analog input is displayed and
maintained in the instrument.
ANSI (acronym)
The acronym ANSI stands for the American
National Standards Institute
ANSI Class
Valve pressure/temperature rating.
Auto Test
The digital valve controller can be configured to
automatically run the partial stroke test.
Auxiliary Input Alert
Checks the status of the auxiliary input; a discrete
input. When enabled, the Auxiliary Input Alert is
active when the auxiliary input terminals are open
or closed (shorted), depending upon the selection
for Auxiliary Input Alert State.
Auxiliary Terminal (Indicator)
Indicates whether auxiliary wiring terminals are
open or closed (such as by an external switch
contact).
May 2007
Pressure, supplied to an actuator, required to
drive the actuator through rated valve travel.
Expressed in pounds per square inch.
A unit of binary digits (bits). A byte consists of
eight bits.
Calibration Location
Where the instrument was last calibrated; either
in the factory or in the field.
Configuration
Stored instructions and operating parameters for
a FIELDVUE instrument.
Control Loop
An arrangement of physical and electronic
components for process control. The electronic
components of the loop continuously measure
one or more aspects of the process, then alter
those aspects as necessary to achieve a desired
process condition. A simple control loop
measures only one variable. More sophisticated
control loops measure many variables and
maintain specified relationships among those
variables.
Control Mode
Defines where the instrument reads its set point.
The following control modes are available for a
FIELDVUE instrument:
Analog The instrument receives its travel set
point over the 4−20 mA loop.
Digital The instrument receives its set point
digitally, via the HART communications link.
Test This is not a user-selectable mode. The
Field Communicator or AMS ValveLink Software
places the instrument in this mode whenever it
needs to move the valve, such as for calibration
or diagnostic tests.
Control Mode, Restart
Determines the instrument control mode after a
restart. See Control Mode for the available restart
control modes.
Glossary-1
12
Glossary
DVC6000 SIS
Controller
A device that operates automatically to regulate a
controlled variable.
Crossover Point
The point at which the feedback pin is closest to
the axis of rotation of the travel sensor. A visual
indication of the crossover point is found when
the slot in the instrument feedback arm forms a
90-degree angle with the valve stem.
Current-to-Pressure (I/P) Converter
An electronic component or device that converts
a milliamp signal to a proportional pneumatic
pressure output signal.
Cycle Counter
The capability of a FIELDVUE instrument to
record the number of times the travel changes
direction. The change in direction must occur
after the deadband has been exceeded before it
can be counted as a cycle.
Cycle Counter Alert
Checks the difference between the Cycle Counter
and the Cycle Counter Alert Point. Cycle Counter
Alert is active when the cycle counter value
exceeds the Cycle Counter Alert Point. It clears
after you reset the Cycle Counter to a value less
than the alert point.
Cycle Counter Alert Point
12
Glossary
An adjustable value which, when exceeded,
activates the Cycle Counter Alert. Valid entries
are 0 to 4 billion cycles.
Device Revision
Revision number of the interface software that
permits communication between the Field
Communicator and the instrument.
Drive Signal
The signal to the I/P converter from the printed
wiring board. It is the percentage of the total
microprocessor effort needed to drive the valve
fully open.
Drive Signal Alert
Checks the drive signal and calibrated travel. If
one of the following conditions exists for more
than 20 seconds, the Drive Signal Alert is active.
If none of the conditions exist, the alert is cleared.
If Zero Power Condition = Closed
The alert is active when:
drive signal <10% and calibrated travel >3%
drive signal >90% and calibrated travel <97%
If Zero Power Condition = Open
The alert is active when:
drive signal <10% and calibrated travel <97%
drive signal >90% and calibrated travel >3%
DVC Power Up
Defines the power up behavior of the DVC6000.
Auto Reset allows the valve to track the
command signal when power is applied to the
device. Manual Reset will lock the device in its
safety position until the digital valve controller is
reset.
Cycle Counter Deadband
Equal Percentage
Deviation
Feedback Arm
Device ID
Feedback Connection
Region around the travel reference point, in
percent of ranged travel, established at the last
increment of the Cycle Counter. The deadband
must be exceeded before a change in travel can
be counted as a cycle. Valid entries are 0% to
100%. Typical value is between 2% and 5%.
Usually, the difference between set point and
process variable. More generally, any departure
from a desired or expected value or pattern.
Unique identifier embedded in the instrument at
the factory.
Glossary-2
A valve flow characteristic where equal
increments of valve stem travel produce equal
percentage changes in existing flow. One of the
input characteristics available for a FIELDVUE
digital valve controller. See also, Linear and
Quick Opening.
The mechanical connection between the valve
stem linkage and the FIELDVUE digital valve
controller travel sensor.
Identifies the type of feedback linkage: rotary,
sliding-stem roller or sliding-stem standard.
May 2007
Glossary
Feedback Signal
Indicates to the instrument the actual position of
the valve. The travel sensor provides the
feedback signal to the instrument printed wiring
board assembly. A mechanical linkage connects
the travel sensor to the valve stem or shaft.
Firmware Revision
The revision number of the instrument firmware.
Firmware is a program that is entered into the
instrument at time of manufacture and cannot be
changed by the user.
Free Time
Percent of time that the microprocessor is idle. A
typical value is 25%. The actual value depends
on the number of functions in the instrument that
are enabled and on the amount of communication
currently in progress.
Full Ranged Travel
Current, in mA, that corresponds with the point
where ranged travel is maximum, i.e., limited by
the mechanical travel stops.
Gain
The ratio of output change to input change.
Hardware Revision
Revision number of the instrument hardware. The
physical components of the instrument are
defined as the hardware.
HART (acronym)
The acronym HART stands for Highway
Addressable Remote Transducer.
HART Tag
An eight-character name that identifies the
physical instrument.
HART Universal Revision
Revision number of the HART Universal
Commands which are the communications
protocol for the instrument.
Input Characteristic
The relationship between the ranged travel and
ranged input. Possible values include: linear,
equal percentage, and quick opening.
May 2007
Input Current
The current signal from the control system that
serves as the analog input to the instrument. See
also Input Signal.
Input Range
The analog input signal range that corresponds to
the travel range.
Input Signal
The current signal from the control system. The
input signal can be displayed in milliamperes or in
percent of ranged input.
Instrument Level
Determines the functions available for the
instrument.
Instrument Mode
Determines if the instrument responds to its
analog input signal. There are two instrument
modes:
In Service: For a fully functioning instrument, the
instrument output changes in response to analog
input changes. Typically changes to setup or
calibration cannot be made when the instrument
mode is In Service.
Out of Service: The instrument output does not
change in response to analog input changes
when the instrument mode is Out of Service.
Some setup parameters can be changed only
when the instrument mode is Out of Service.
Instrument Protection
Determines if commands from a HART device
can calibrate and/or configure certain parameters
in the instrument. There are two types of
instrument protection:
Configuration and Calibration: Prohibits
changing protected setup parameters; prohibits
calibration.
None: Permits both configuration and calibration.
The instrument is “unprotected.”
Instrument Serial Number
The serial number assigned to the printed wiring
board by the factory but can be changed during
setup. The instrument serial number should
match the serial number on the instrument
nameplate.
Glossary-3
12
Glossary
DVC6000 SIS
Leak Class
Defines the allowable leakage by a valve when it
is closed. Leak class numbers are listed in two
standards: ANSI/FCI 70-2 and IEC 534-4.
Linear
A valve flow characteristic where changes in flow
rate are directly proportional to changes in valve
stem travel. One of the input characteristics
available for a FIELDVUE digital valve controller.
See also, Equal Percentage and Quick Opening.
Linearity, dynamic
Linearity (independent) is the maximum deviation
from a straight line best fit to the opening and
closing curves and a line representing the
average value of those curves.
Local Control Panel
The LCP100 local control panel is used with the
FIELDVUE DVC6000 SIS digital valve controller.
This panel is used to monitor and manually open
and close a safety shutdown valve. The LCP100
also provides a manual reset feature and a button
for initiating a partial stroke test.
Manual Reset
The DVC6000 Series digital valve controller in
SIS applications can be configured to hold the trip
state until a local reset button is pressed.
12
Glossary
Memory
A type of semiconductor used for storing
programs or data. FIELDVUE instruments use
three types of memory: Random Access Memory
(RAM), Read Only Memory (ROM), and
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM). See also these
listings in this glossary.
Menu
A list of programs, commands, or other activities
that you select by using the arrow keys to
highlight the item then pressing ENTER, or by
entering the numeric value of the menu item.
Minimum Closing Time
Minimum time, in seconds, for the travel to
decrease through the entire ranged travel. This
rate is applied to any travel decrease. Valid
entries are 0 to 400 seconds. Deactivate by
entering a value of 0 seconds.
Glossary-4
Minimum Opening Time
Minimum time, in seconds, for the travel to
increase through the entire ranged travel. This
rate is applied to any travel increase. Because of
friction, actual valve travel may not respond in
exactly the same time frame. Valid entries are 0
to 400 seconds. Deactivate by entering a value of
0 seconds.
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)
A type of semiconductor memory that retains its
contents even though power is disconnected.
NVM contents can be changed during
configuration unlike ROM which can be changed
only at time of instrument manufacture. NVM
stores configuration restart data.
Parallel
Simultaneous: said of data transmission on two or
more channels at the same time.
Polling Address
Address of the instrument. If the digital valve
controller is used in a point-to-point configuration,
set the polling address to 0. If it is used in a
multidrop configuration, or split range application,
set the polling address to a value from 0 to 15.
Pressure Sensor
A FIELDVUE instrument internal device that
senses pneumatic pressure. DVC6000 Series
digital valve controllers have three pressure
sensors: one to sense supply pressure and two to
sense the output pressures.
Primary Master
Masters are communicating devices. A primary
master is a communicating device permanently
wired to a field instrument. Typically, a
HART-compatible control system or a computer
running AMS ValveLink Software is the primary
master.
In contrast, a secondary master is not often
permanently wired to a field instrument. The
Model 375 Field Communicator or a computer
running ValveLink software communicating
through a HART modem could be considered a
secondary master.
Note: If one type of master takes an instrument
Out Of Service, the same type must put it In
Service. For example, if a device set up as a
primary master takes an instrument Out Of
Service, a device set up as a primary master
must be used to place the instrument In Service.
May 2007
Glossary
Quick Opening
A valve flow characteristic where most of the
change in flow rate takes place for small amounts
of stem travel from the closed position. The flow
characteristic curve is basically linear through the
first 40 percent of stem travel. One of the input
characteristics available for a FIELDVUE digital
valve controller. See also, Equal Percentage and
Linear.
Temperature Sensor
A device within the FIELDVUE instrument that
measures the instrument’s internal temperature.
Travel
Movement of the valve stem or shaft which
changes the amount the valve is open or closed.
Travel Accumulator
Random Access Memory (RAM)
A type of semiconductor memory that is normally
used by the microprocessor during normal
operation that permits rapid retrieval and storage
of programs and data. See also Read Only
Memory (ROM) and Non-Volatile Memory (NVM).
Rate
Amount of change in output proportional to the
rate of change in input.
Read-Only Memory (ROM)
A memory in which information is stored at the
time of instrument manufacture. You can
examine but not change ROM contents.
Seat Load
Force exerted on the valve seat, typically
expressed in pounds force per lineal inch of port
circumference. Seat load is determined by shutoff
requirements.
Set Point Filter Time
The time constant, in seconds, for the first-order
input filter.
Software
Microprocessor or computer programs and
routines that reside in alterable memory (usually
RAM), as opposed to firmware, which consists of
programs and routines that are programmed into
memory (usually ROM) when the instrument is
manufactured. Software can be manipulated
during normal operation, firmware cannot.
Stroking Time
The time, in seconds, required to move the valve
from its fully open position to fully closed, or vice
versa.
May 2007
The capability of a FIELDVUE instrument to
record total change in travel. The value of the
Travel Accumulator increments when the
magnitude of the change exceeds the Travel
Accumulator Deadband. To reset the Travel
Accumulator, set it to zero.
Travel Accumulator Alert
Checks the difference between the Travel
Accumulator value and the Travel Accumulator
Alert Point. The Travel Accumulator Alert is active
when the Travel Accumulator value exceeds the
Travel Accumulator Alert Point. It clears after you
reset the Travel Accumulator to a value less than
the alert point.
Travel Accumulator Alert Point
An adjustable value which, when exceeded,
activates the Travel Accumulator Alert. Valid
entries are 0% to 4 billion %.
Travel Accumulator Deadband
Region around the travel reference point
established at the last increment of the
accumulator. This region must be exceeded
before a change in travel can be accumulated.
Valid entries are 0% to 100%.
Travel Alert
Checks the ranged travel against the travel high
and low alert points. The travel alert is active if
either the high or low point is exceeded. Once a
high or low point is exceeded, the ranged travel
must clear that point by the Travel Alert
Deadband before the alert clears. Four travel
alerts are available: Travel Alert Hi, Travel Alert
Lo, Travel Alert Hi Hi, and Travel Alert Lo Lo.
Travel Alert Deadband
Travel, in percent of ranged travel, required to
clear a travel alert, once it is active. Valid entries
are −25% to 125%.
Glossary-5
12
Glossary
DVC6000 SIS
Travel Alert High Point
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi
alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
Travel Alert High High Point
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Hi Hi
alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
Travel Alert Low Point
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Lo
alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
Travel Alert Low Low Point
Value of the travel, in percent of ranged travel,
which, when exceeded, sets the Travel Alert Lo
Lo alert. Valid entries are −25% to 125%.
Travel Deviation Alert Point
An adjustable value for the target travel and the
ranged travel difference, expressed in percent,
When this value is exceeded by the travel
deviation for more than the Travel Deviation
Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is active. Valid
entries are 0% to 100%. Typically this is set to
5%.
Travel Deviation Time
The time, in seconds. that the travel deviation
must exceed the Travel Deviation Alert Point
before the alert is active. Valid entries are 1 to 60
seconds.
Travel Limit
A setup parameter that defines the maximum
allowable travel (in percent of ranged travel) for
the valve. During operation, the travel target will
not exceed this limit. There are two travel limits:
high and low. Typically the travel limit low will be
used to keep the valve from going completely
closed.
Travel Range
Travel Cutoff
12
Glossary
Defines the cutoff point for the travel, in percent
of ranged travel. There are two travel cutoffs:
high and low. Once travel exceeds the cutoff, the
drive signal is set to either maximum or minimum,
depending on the aero power condition and if the
cutoff is high or low. Minimum opening time or
minimum closing time are not in effect while the
travel is beyond the cutoff. Use the travel cutoff to
obtain the desired seat load or to be sure the
valve is fully open.
Travel Deviation
The difference between the analog input signal (in
percent of ranged input), the “target” travel, and
the actual “ranged” travel.
Travel, in percent of calibrated travel, that
corresponds to the input range.
Travel Sensor
A device within the FIELDVUE instrument that
senses valve stem or shaft movement. The travel
sensor is mechanically connected to the valve
stem or shaft.
Travel Sensor Motion
Establishes motion of the travel sensor. While
viewing the end of the travel sensor shaft, if
increasing air pressure to the actuator causes the
shaft to rotate clockwise, travel sensor motion is
CW. If increasing air pressure causes the shaft to
rotate counterclockwise, travel sensor motion is
CCW.
Tuning
Travel Deviation Alert
Checks the difference between the target and the
ranged travel. If the difference exceeds the Travel
Deviation Alert Point for more than the Travel
Deviation Time, the Travel Deviation Alert is
active. It remains active until the difference is less
than the Travel Deviation Alert Point.
Glossary-6
The adjustment of control terms or parameter
values to produce a desired control effect.
Tuning Set
Preset values that identify gain settings for a
FIELDVUE instrument. The tuning set and supply
pressure together determine an instrument’s
response to input signal changes.
May 2007
Glossary
Watch Dog Timer
A timer that the microprocessor must rearm
periodically. If the microprocessor is unable to
rearm the timer, the instrument goes through
reset.
Zero Power Condition
The position of the valve when the power to the
positioner is turned off. It is used to reference 0%
travel. For Relay A and C, Port A will be at
atmosphere pressure, and if double-acting, Port B
will be at supply pressure. For Relay B, Port B
will be at supply pressure.
12
Glossary
May 2007
Glossary-7
DVC6000 SIS
12
Glossary
Glossary-8
May 2007
Index
A
Auto Calibrate Travel, 6-3
Error Messages, 6-4
Actuator Style, 5-22
Auto Test Interval , 5-24
adjustment arm, 2-6
Aux Term Mode , 5-21
Alert Conditions, 7-3
Alert Record, 7-4
Electronics, 7-3
Environment, 7-4
Sensor, 7-3
SIS, 7-4
Travel, 7-4
Travel History, 7-4
Auxiliary Input, Displaying Status, 7-9
Alert Groups, 5-18
Failure Alerts, 5-19
Miscellaneous, 5-19
Valve Alerts, 5-19
Alert Record, 5-18
Alerts, 5-14
Alert Record, 5-18
Alert Groups, 5-18
Enabling Alert Groups, 5-18
Electronic, 5-15
Drive Signal Alert, 5-15
Processor Impaired Alerts, 5-15
Environment, 5-15
Environmental
Aux Terminal Alerts, 5-15
Supply Press Lo Alert, 5-16
Sensor, 5-15
SIS, 5-18
Travel, 5-16
Deviation Alert, 5-16
Limit Alerts, 5-16
Travel Limit Cutoff Alerts, 5-17
Travel Limit Hi/Lo Alerts, 5-16
Travel History, 5-17
Cycle Count, 5-17
Cycle Count/Tvl Accum Deadband, 5-17
Tvl Accum, 5-17
Auxiliary Terminal, 7-6
Local DI, 7-6
Wiring Length Guidelines, 7-6
auxiliary terminal button, 5-12
B
bias spring, 2-6
Burst Mode, 5-5
Commands, 5-5
Enabling, 5-5
C
Calibration
Analog Input, 6-10
Auto Calibrate Travel, 6-3
Error Messages, 6-4
Manual Calibrate Travel, 6-4
Pressure Sensors, 6-6
PST, 6-12
Relay Adjustment, 6-10
Sensor Calibration, 6-6
Pressure Sensors, 6-6
Travel
Auto, 6-3
Manual, 6-4
Analog Calibration Adjust, 6-4
Digital Calibration Adjust, 6-5
Travel Sensor, 6-7
Travel Sensor Adjust, 6-7
Calibration , Travel, 6-2
Analog Calibration Adjust, 6-4
Calibration & Diagnostics, 5-19
Analog Input
Displaying Value, 7-9
Units, 5-20
Calibration Status and Location, 5-21
Analog Input Calibration, 6-10
Analog Input Range, 5-20
ASCO Solenoid Valve, 2-21
ATEX
Nameplates, 11-4
Special Conditions for Safe Use, 2-3, 2-4
May 2007
Communication Cable Capacitance, 2-18
Communication Connections, 2-16
Connections
Electrical
4 to 20 mA Loop, 2-15
Communication, 2-16
Test, 2-16
Pneumatic
Output, 2-13
Index-1
Index
DVC6000 SIS
Supply, 2-12
Pressure, 2-12
Vent, 2-14
Educational Services, 1-7
Control Mode, 5-4
EF8316G303, ASCO solenoid valve, 2-21
Control System Requirements
Compliance Voltage, 2-18
Voltage Available, 2-17
EF8316G304, ASCO solenoid valve, 2-21
CSA
Loop Schematics, DVC6000 and
DVC6000S, 11-2
Nameplates, 11-2
Special Conditions of Safe Use, 2-3
Cycle Count, 5-17
Cycle Counter
Displaying Value, 7-9
Enabling Alert, 5-17
Resetting, 5-17
D
Date, 5-20, 5-21
DD Information, 7-10
Declaration of SEP, 1-5
Define Custom Characteristic, 5-14
Demand Mode Tests, 7-7
Point-to-Point Mode, 7-7
when LCP100 is used, 7-8
Description, DVC6000 Series, 1-3
Descriptor, 5-20
Index
E
Detailed Setup, 5-4
Device Information, 7-10
Device Record, 7-5
Device Revision, 7-10
Electromagnetic Interference, 1-4
Emergency Mode Tests, Multidrop Mode, 7-7
End Point Pressure Control, 5-13
End Point Pressure Deviation, 7-4
Error Messages, Auto Calibrate Travel, 6-4
F
Factory Settings, Restoring, 6-11
Feedback Connection, 5-22
Field Communicator
Device Description Revision, 3-6
Display, 3-2
Hot Key, 3-4
Offline Menu, 3-4
Online Menu, 3-6
Online Simulation, 3-5
Polling, 3-5
Soft Input Panel Keyboard (SIP), 3-3
Specifications, 3-2
System Information, 3-5
Using the Keypad, 3-2
filter, 40 micron, 2-13
Firmware Revision, 7-10
FM
Loop Schematics, DVC6000 and
DVC6000S, 11-3
Nameplates, 11-3
Special Conditions of Safe Use, 2-3
follower arm extension, 2-8
Free Time, Self Test Failure, enabling to
cause instrument shutdown, 5-15
Device Variables, 7-9
Digital Calibration Adjust, 6-5
DIP Switch, 2-20
Setting, 9-8
Drive Signal, Displaying Value, 7-9
DVC Power Up, 5-24
G
Gauges, Tire Valves, & Pipe Plugs
Parts List, 10-4
Replacing, 9-9
DVC6000 Series, Principle of Operation, 8-2
H
Dynamic Response, 5-14
Hardware Revision, 7-10
Index-2
May 2007
Index
HART Communication, Principle of Operation,
8-2
L
HART Tag, 5-19
Lag Time, 5-14
Hazardous Area Approvals, 2-3
LCP100 Local Control Panel, Installation, 2-24
Hot Key, Field Communicator, 3-4
Line Conditioner, Part Number, 10-5
Humidity Limits, 1-4
Line conditioner, 2-21
Locked in Safety Alert, 7-4
I
I/P Converter
Parts List, 10-4
Removing, 9-7
Replacing, 9-7
Replacing Filter, 9-6
Loop Connections, 4 to 20 mA , 2-15
Loop Schematics, DVC6000 and DVC6000S
CSA, 11-2
FM, 11-3
M
IEC 61010 Compliance Requirements, 1-5
Manual Calibrate Travel, 6-4
IEC 61326-1 (Edition 1.1), 1-4
Manual Conventions, 1-2
IECEx
Conditions of Certification, 2-4
Nameplates, 11-5
Manual Reset, 7-7
Independent Linearity, 1-4
Initial Setup, 4-2
Manufacturer, 5-21
Max Travel Movement, 5-22
Maximum Supply Pressure, 5-21
maximum supply pressure, 5-21
Input Characterization, 5-13
Message, 5-20
Input Range, 5-20
Module Base
Removal, 9-5
Replacing, 9-6
Input Signal
Multi-drop, 1-4
Point-to-Point, 1-4
Installation
2-Wire System, 2-20
4-Wire System, 2-20
LCP100 (Local Control Panel), 2-24
Instrument Clock, Setting, 5-19
Instrument Date and Time, 5-21
Instrument Level, 7-10
Instrument Mode, 4-2, 5-4
Instrument Serial Number, 5-20
Instrument Status, 7-4
Viewing, 7-4
Integral Action, Enable Integral Settings, 5-7
Integral Dead Zone, 5-19
Integral Limit, 5-7
Integral Settings, 5-7
Internal Temperature, Displaying Value, 7-9
May 2007
Module Base, Parts List, 10-4
Module Base Maintenance, 9-5
Mounting, 1-5, 2-5
67CFR, 2-11
DVC6010, 2-5
DVC6020, 2-7
DVC6030, 2-9
Index
N
Nameplates
ATEX
Flameproof, Dust-Tight, 11-4
Intrinsic Safety, Dust-Tight, 11-4
Type n, Dust-Tight, 11-4
CSA, 11-2
FM, 11-3
IECEx, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof,
11-5
NEPSI, Intrinsic Safety, Flameproof, Dust,
11-5
Index-3
DVC6000 SIS
NEPSI
Nameplates, 11-5
Notes for Safe Use of the Certified Product,
2-4
Polling Address, 5-20
Pressure Connections, 2-12
Number of Power Ups, Displaying Status,
7-10
Pressure Sensor Calibration, 6-6
O
Pressure Tuning Sets, Gain Values, 5-11
Output Connections, 2-13
Double-Acting Actuators, 2-13
Principle of Operation, DVC6000, 8-2
Output Pressure, Displaying Value, 7-9
Output Signal, 1-4
P
Parameters, Factory Default, Detailed Setup,
5-4
Partial Stroke Test, 7-5
Configuring
Partial Stroke Pressure Limit, 5-22
Pause Time, 5-22
Stroke Speed, 5-22
Initiating
Auxiliary Terminal, 7-6
Local Control Panel, 7-6
Local Push Button, 7-6
Device (Digital Valve Controller), 7-5
Model 375 Field Communicator, 7-7
initiating, 7-5
Partial Stroke Test (PST), 7-4
Index
Replacing, 9-9
Parts
Common Parts, 10-3
Feedback Parts, 10-5
Gauges, Tire Valves, & Pipe Plugs, 10-4
I/P Converter Assembly, 10-4
Kits, 10-2
Module Base, 10-4
Ordering, 10-2
Printed Wiring Board Assembly, 10-4
Relay, 10-4
Terminal Box, 10-4
Pause Time, 5-22
Performance Tuner, 4-5, 5-7
Pneumatic Relay
Adjusting, 6-10
Parts List, 10-4
Removing, 9-8
Index-4
Pressure Set Point, 5-13
Setting manually, 5-13
Pressure Units, 5-20
Printed Wiring Board Assembly
Parts List, 10-4
Removing, 9-7
Replacing, 9-8
Setting DIP Switch, 9-8
Setting DIP Switch, 2-20
Protection, 4-2, 5-6
PST Calibration, 6-12
PST Press Limit
double acting actuators, 5-22
single acting actuators, 5-22
R
Raw Travel Input, Displaying Status, 7-10
Related Documents, 1-3
Relay
Double-Acting, 6-10
Single-Acting Direct, 6-11
Single-Acting Reverse, 6-11
Relay A, 6-10
Relay Adjustment, 6-10
Double-Acting, 6-10
Relay B, 6-11
Relay C, 6-11
Relay Type, 5-20
reset, 5-11
Restart Control Mode, 5-5
Revision Information
DVC6000
Device, 7-10
Firmware, 7-10
Hardware, 7-10
HART Universal, 7-10
Field Communicator, Device Description,
3-6
May 2007
Index
Run Time, Displaying Status, 7-10
Stroking the Output, with Field Communicator,
7-5
S
Supply Connections, 2-12
Safety Instrumented System, Installation, 2-20
2-Wire System, 2-20
4-Wire System, 2-20
LCP100 (Local Control Panel) Installation,
2-24
Supply Pressure, 1-4
Displaying Value, 7-9
T
Serial Number
Instrument, 5-20
Valve, 5-20, 5-21
Temperature
Maximum Recorded, Displaying Value, 7-9
Minimum Recorded, Displaying Value, 7-9
Units, 5-20
Set Point Rate Close, 5-14
Temperature Limits, Operating Ambient, 1-4
Set Point Rate Open, 5-14
Shaft Rotation, 1-5
Terminal Box
Parts List, 10-4
Removing, 9-9
Replacing, 9-10
Single-Acting Actuators, 2-13
Test Connections, 2-16
SIS
Pressure Mode Enable, 5-13
Valve Stuck Alert, 5-25
Third-Party Approvals, 2-3
Setup Wizard, 4-3
SIS Alerts, 5-18
SIS Panel Comm Error, 7-4
Solenoid Valve, Health Monitoring, 2-14, 7-8
special application, 2-14
Special Instructions for Safe Use and
Installations in Hazardous Locations, 2-3
ATEX Flameproof, Dust, 2-3
ATEX Intrinsic Safety, Dust, 2-3
ATEX Type n, Dust, 2-4
CSA, 2-3
FM, 2-3
IECEx Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Flameproof,
2-4
NEPSI, 2-4
Specifications, DVC6000 Series, 1-3
Stabilize/Optimize, 5-7
Status, 5-19
Calibration & Diagnostics, 5-19
Instrument Time, 5-19
Integrator, 5-19
Operational, 5-19
Steady-State Air Consumption, 1-4
Stem Travel, 1-5
Stroke Speed, 5-22
Stroke Valve, 7-5
May 2007
Tier Capabilities, 1-2
Travel, Displaying Value, 7-9
Travel / Pressure Control, 5-12
Cutoffs, 5-12
End Point Pressure Control, 5-13
Travel Accumulation Alert Enable, 5-17
Travel Accumulator
Displaying Value, 7-9
Enabling Alert, 5-17
Resetting, 5-18
Travel Accumulator Alerts, 5-17
Travel Cutoff Alerts, 5-17
Travel Cutoffs, Adjustable, 5-12
Index
Travel Deviation Alert, 5-16
Travel History Alerts, 5-17
travel indicator assembly, 2-10
Travel Sensor
Adjusting
DVC6010, 6-7
DVC6020, 6-8
DVC6030, 6-7
Parts List, 10-5
Removing
DVC6010, 9-10
DVC6020, 9-11
DVC6030, 9-11
Replacing
DVC6010, 9-11
Index-5
DVC6000 SIS
DVC6020, 9-12
DVC6030, 9-13
Travel Sensor Adjust, 6-7
Travel Sensor Motion, 5-22
Travel Target, Displaying Value, 7-9
Variables, Device, 7-9
Vent, 2-14
Voltage Available
Calculating, 2-17
Checking, 9-4
Travel Tuning Sets, Gain Values, 5-6
Troubleshooting, 9-2
Tuning, 5-6
Pressure, 5-10
Travel, 5-6
Tuning Sets
Pressure, 5-10
Gain Values, 5-11
Travel, 5-6
Gain Values, 5-6
TÜV Certification, 1-3
V
Valve Serial Number, 5-20, 5-21
Valve Style, 5-22
W
Weight, Valve-Mounted Instruments, 1-5
Wiring Length Guidelines, Auxiliary Terminal ,
7-6
Wiring Practices
Communication Cable Capacitance, 2-18
Control System Requirements, 2-17
Compliance Voltage, 2-18
Voltage Available, 2-17
Z
Zero Power Condition, 5-21
Index
Index-6
May 2007
FIELDVUE, ValveLink, PlantWeb and Fisher are marks owned by Fisher Controls International LLC, a member of the Emerson Process
Management business division of Emerson Electric Co. Emerson and the Emerson logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric
Co. AMS is a mark owned by one of the Emerson Process Management group of companies. ASCO is a mark owned by one of the Emerson
Industrial Automation group of companies. HART is a mark owned by the HART Comunication Foundation. All other marks are the property of
their respective owners. This product may be covered under one or more of the following patents (5,163, 463; 5,265,637; 5,381,817; 5,434,774;
5,439,021; 5,451,923; 5,502,999; 5,532,925; 5,533,544; 5,549,137; 5,558,115; 5,573,032; 5,687,098) or under pending patents.
The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they
are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or
applicability. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice.
Neither Emerson, Emerson Process Management, nor any of their affiliated entities assumes responsibility for the selection, use and
maintenance of any product. Responsibility for the selection, use and maintenance of any product remains with the purchaser and end-user.
Emerson Process Management
Marshalltown, Iowa 50158 USA
Cernay 68700 France
Sao Paulo 05424 Brazil
Singapore 128461
www.Fisher.com
Fisher Controls International LLC 2007; All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement